JP7716752B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

The gaming machine is equipped with a probability fluctuation state that changes the probability of a jackpot from low to high, and by setting an upper limit on the continuation of the probability fluctuation state so that the number of jackpots that occur as a result of the probability fluctuation state continuing does not exceed a predetermined number, healthy gameplay is achieved and a decline in interest in the game is prevented (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-28573

However, there was room for improvement to achieve even more robust gameplay and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In light of this situation, the present invention aims to achieve sound gameplay and prevent a decline in interest in games.

A gaming machine according to the present invention comprises main control means for executing predetermined control, effect control means capable of controlling effects in effect display means and sound output means based on control information transmitted from the main control means, a prize opening provided in a gaming area and into which game balls can enter, adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume value of the sound output from the sound output means, and a movable body capable of performing a predetermined operation , wherein the main control means comprises acquisition means for acquiring judgment information, judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, and restriction means for restricting execution of the predetermined control when a value of specific information that can be calculated from the number of prize balls awarded by balls entering the prize opening and the number of game balls used in the game after a calculation condition is met satisfies a predetermined value, and when the value of the specific information satisfies the predetermined value during execution of the special game, execution of the predetermined control can be restricted after the special game has ended, and restriction on execution of the predetermined control can be lifted when power is supplied accompanied by an initialization operation, and the effect control means can execute an initial operation of the movable body when power is supplied. and when the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value, a predetermined caution image can be displayed on the effect display means; when the power supply is cut off while the predetermined caution image is being displayed and then power is supplied accompanied by the initialization operation, an initial operation of the movable body can be performed without displaying the predetermined caution image; when the power supply is cut off while the predetermined caution image is being displayed and then power is supplied without the initialization operation, the predetermined caution image can be displayed, and the initial operation of the movable body can be performed while the predetermined caution image is being displayed; after the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value during execution of the special game and before execution of the predetermined control is restricted after the special game has ended, adjustment of the volume value is possible, but after execution of the predetermined control is restricted after the special game has ended, adjustment of the volume value is restricted; and when the value of the specific information has changed by a second number greater than a first number, the remaining number image can be updated and displayed.

This invention makes it possible to achieve healthy gameplay and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

1 is a front view of the appearance of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a rear view of the appearance of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing a special symbol winning determination table and a normal symbol winning determination table according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing (A) a special symbol determination table, (B) a normal symbol determination table, and (C) details of rounds for each winning special symbol according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a game state transition diagram according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing a special pattern variation pattern table related to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing a determination information storage area of a main RAM according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a counter of the main RAM; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a command table (1/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a command table (2/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart (1/2) showing a main control board main process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart (2/2) showing the main control board main process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing a setting value change process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing a setting value confirmation process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing main control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing an input SW detection process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the processing when the first starting port is detected in the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing a process at the time of out detection according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of special symbol variation according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing processing during special pattern fluctuation according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing processing by game state according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning game process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing an abnormality determination process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing a limit management process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control board according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing the performance control board timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing an operation device input process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing a main command receiving process (1/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing a main command receiving process (2/2) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing the hold consecutive presentation determination process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing the difference ball counter display control process according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the winning sound, variable sound, and starting port light-emitting device (color) for each icon in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. A figure showing the notice determination table 1 (pre-reach notice) related to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a dialogue advance determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a button vibration notification determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing the prediction determination table 2 (reach prediction) for the first embodiment of the present invention. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing (a) a logo preview determination table and (b) a vehicle group preview determination table according to the first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing (a) a notice determination table 3 (super reach notice_conversation notice) relating to the first embodiment of the present invention, and (b) a diagram showing notice determination table 4 (super reach notice_cut-in notice). A figure showing (c) notice determination table 5 (judgment during super reach) relating to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a diagram showing a mode of a dialogue preview according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the mode of button vibration notification according to the first embodiment of the present invention; A figure showing the form of a logo preview in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing the state of a logo preview with pseudo-consecutive hits in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an aspect of vehicle group warning in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing the form of a cut-in preview in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the form of the judgement effect according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a diagram showing an aspect of a conversation preview according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a diagram showing an aspect of a conversation preview according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a diagram showing an aspect of a conversation preview according to the first embodiment of the present invention; 1 is a simplified time chart (normal game state) of the variable presentation according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is a simplified time chart of the variable effects (time-saving game state, special game state) in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of game number display (variation pattern 2) related to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of game number display (variation pattern 3) related to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of game number display (variation pattern 4) related to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of the game number display (variation pattern 10) related to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of game number display (variation pattern 6) related to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the number of games played according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an update mode of the game count display in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an update mode of the game count display in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an update mode of the game count display in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an update mode of the game count display in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of the number of games displayed for each presentation stage in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an update mode of the game count display in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example (irregular case) of the update mode of the game number display in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example of an update mode of the game count display in the first embodiment of the present invention (a modified example of Figure 66). 5A and 5B are diagrams illustrating a notification mode when a limit function according to the first embodiment of the present invention is activated. This figure explains the notification mode when the time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the present invention is ended and the game state is changed to the normal game state, and the notification mode when the limit function is activated in the time-saving game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the notification mode when the limit function is activated in a winning game according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 5A to 5C are diagrams illustrating various operational modes when a limit function according to the first embodiment of the present invention is activated. 5A and 5B are diagrams illustrating a notification mode when the power is turned on according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating a notification mode when a limit function is installed according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating a notification mode when a limit function is installed according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating a notification mode when a limit function is installed according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating advance notification before activation of a limit function according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 5A to 5C are diagrams illustrating various modes of advance notification before activation of a limit function according to the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure explaining the aspect of the pre-reading presentation according to the current difference in the number of balls in the first embodiment of the present invention. A figure explaining the aspect of the pre-reading presentation according to the current difference in the number of balls in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In the first embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 (a pachinko gaming machine capable of discharging gaming balls to the outside of the gaming machine) will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention. In the following description, the terms "front,""rear,""left,""right,""upper," and "lower" refer to the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 as viewed from the player's side.

As shown in Figure 1, pachinko gaming machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2 for installation on a gaming machine installation island (not shown) in an amusement parlor; a middle frame 3 pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and removably holding a gaming board 6 (shown in Figure 3); a glass frame 4 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and facing the front of the gaming board 6, allowing the gaming board 6 to be viewed through transparent glass; and a tray member 5 pivotally supported by the middle frame 3 and located below the glass frame 4, capable of storing gaming balls. Note that the glass frame 4 and tray member 5 may be configured as separate units or as an integrated unit.

The middle frame 3 is provided with a launching device for launching game balls into the play area 7 of the game board 6, and is provided with a launch handle 8 for operating the launching device. The launch handle 8 is held by the player and can be rotated within a predetermined range, and the amount of rotation (volume) can be adjusted to control the launch strength when launching game balls into the play area 7. For example, when rotated a first rotation amount (first launch strength), the game ball is launched to the left side of the play area 7 (play area 7a shown in Figure 3) (so-called "left shot" is possible), and when rotated a second rotation amount greater than the first rotation amount (second launch strength), the game ball is launched to the right side of the play area 7 (play area 7b shown in Figure 3) (so-called "right shot" is possible). The play area 7a forms a predetermined path, and the play area 7b forms a specific path.

A handle touch sensor (not shown) is provided on the launch handle 8. This handle touch sensor turns ON when the player is holding the launch handle 8, and this ON signal is input to the payout control board 300. This makes it possible to know that the launch handle 8 is being held by the player.

A light-emitting device 9 (lamp, LED, etc.) is provided in the glass frame 4, which can decorate the pachinko gaming machine 1 by emitting light. For example, in the special symbol hit determination process described below, if a hit is determined, the light can emit rainbow colors to notify the player that a hit has occurred.

Furthermore, a speaker 10 is provided above the glass frame 4, and is capable of outputting music (BGM), voice, and sound effects. For example, when a normal game state (described later) is being controlled, music corresponding to the normal game state can be output, when a time-saving game state (A, B) (described later) is being controlled, music corresponding to the time-saving game state (A, B) can be output, and when a probability variable game state (described later) is being controlled, music corresponding to the probability variable game state can be output.
A lower speaker 10 is provided below the glass frame 4, and is capable of outputting voice and sound effects. The lower speaker 10 is provided with a speaker lamp 10a, which lights up during the flash effect when a prize is won, as described below.

The light-emitting device 9 and speaker 10 are capable of issuing an abnormality alert when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the light-emitting device 9 can emit light in a lighting pattern specifically designed for abnormality alerts, and the speaker 10 can output voice or warning sounds that alert users to the specific nature of the abnormality.

The tray member 5 is composed of an upper tray 5a and a lower tray 5b. When the amount of game balls stored in the upper tray 5a exceeds a certain amount, the game balls are dispensed into the lower tray 5b. The tray member 5 also has a ball removal button 11 for discharging game balls stored in the upper tray 5a into the lower tray 5b at the end of a game, a ball lending button 12 for requesting the dispensing of game balls from a game ball lending device (not shown), a card return button 13 for requesting the return of a valuable medium (prepaid card, membership card) inserted into the insertion port of the game ball lending device, a balance display 12a for displaying the remaining balance of the valuable medium, and a ball lending available lamp 12b for indicating that ball lending is available by operating the ball lending button 12.

The tray member 5 is also provided with an effect button 14 and an effect lever 15 that can be operated by the player when an operation promotion effect is executed to encourage operation of each operation means (for example, an effect in which an image resembling an operation means is displayed together with an image saying "Press the operation means!"). Note that the effect button 14 and the effect lever 15 may be provided independently of each other, or may be provided as a single unit.

In addition, a vibration device may be provided on either or both of the effect button 14 and effect lever 15 to vibrate them. For example, they may vibrate as a preview effect (see Figure 37), or they may vibrate to notify players that a winning game will be played. Note that only either the effect button 14 or the effect lever 15 may be provided, or multiple copies of either may be provided.

The tray member 5 also has a cross key button 16 that can be operated by the player to adjust the volume of the music (BGM), voice, and sound effects output from the speaker 10, adjust the amount of light emitted from the light-emitting device 9, adjust the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26 (described below), and activate the menu screen to perform operations corresponding to each menu. Note that the cross key button 16 serves as an operating device for performing operations related to the menu screen, and a separate, independent operating device dedicated to adjusting the volume and light amount may also be provided.

Furthermore, a decorative portion 2a is provided at the upper end of the outer frame 2. This decorative portion 2a extends further upward from the upper end of the outer frame and has a shape resembling, for example, a character, to create a visual impact. However, some players may find it difficult to see the components (e.g., external information display 800) located behind the decorative portion 2a.
The decorative portion 2a may always extend upward from the upper end of the outer frame 2, or may be configured to change from a stored state to an extended state when a predetermined trigger is met.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on Figure 2. The rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards, such as the main control board 100, performance control board 200, payout control board 300, payout device 304, and power supply board 400 (to be precise, these various control boards are attached to the rear side of the inner frame 3), which will be described later.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a RAM clear switch 105. The RAM clear switch 105 is a switch for initializing game information in the main RAM 103 area that is rewritten as games are played. For example, if the game parlor closes while the game is in the time-saving game mode (A or B), an administrator (e.g., a game parlor employee) can turn the power on while pressing the RAM clear switch 105, clearing the game information in the time-saving game mode (A or B), and allowing the game to start from the normal game mode when the parlor opens the next day.

The RAM clear switch 105 also functions as a switch for switching setting values in the setting change state described below. Details will be provided in the flowchart below, but for example, in the case of six setting values, when setting value "1" is displayed on the display 104 described below, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once will switch the setting value from "1" to "2." Pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once more will switch the setting value from "2" to "3." Thereafter, each time the RAM clear switch 105 is pressed, the setting value will switch to "4," "5," and "6." When setting value "6" is displayed on the display 104, pressing the RAM clear switch 105 once will switch the setting value from "6" to "1."

Although the RAM clear switch 105 is provided on the main control board 100, it may also be provided on the power supply board 400 or directly on the inner frame 3, for example, as long as it can be input to the main control board 100.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a setting change keyhole 31 (also referred to as a setting key SW in this embodiment). The setting change keyhole 31 is used to set one of the multiple setting value stages described below. Specifically, when a setting change key (not shown) managed by a gaming parlor staff member is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (from vertical to horizontal), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered ON (power SW 400a is ON) while pressing the RAM clear switch 105 described above, the setting change state in which a setting value can be set is entered. Details of the setting change state will be described later in the flowchart.

The setting change keyhole 31 is also used to check the currently set setting values. Specifically, when a setting change key managed by a gaming parlor staff member is inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (from vertical to horizontal), and the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON (power SW 400a is turned ON), the machine enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values can be checked. Details of the setting confirmation state will be explained later in the flowchart.

The setting change keyhole 31 can be rotated using the setting change key, and the main CPU 101 can detect three positions (states), for example, vertical position, horizontal position, and diagonal position.

Note that while the setting change keyhole 31 is provided on the main control board 100, the installation location is not limited to this. For example, the setting change keyhole 31 may be provided on the inner frame 3.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a display 104. If the setting is changed or confirmed, the display 104 displays the setting value. If the setting is not changed or confirmed, the display 104 displays game performance information calculated using the formula, for example, "(number of paid-out balls in normal game mode ÷ number of balls out in normal game mode) × 100."

When the game is not in a setting change state or setting confirmation state (for example, when interrupts are permitted in step S24 of FIG. 13), game performance information is calculated at each interrupt (for example, every 4 ms), and the current section and three previous sections (one section before, two sections before, and three sections before) can be displayed at each specified display timing (for example, every 5 seconds). That is, the display switches between the following: display of the current section → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds have elapsed) → display of past section (1) → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds have elapsed) → display of past section (2) → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds have elapsed) → display of past section (3) → predetermined time has elapsed (5 seconds have elapsed) → display of the current section.

Next, the configuration of the game board 6 of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained based on Figure 3. The game board 6 is made of plywood or transparent synthetic resin material, and an image display device 26 is removably attached to the back side. The game board 6 is formed with a game area 7 in which game balls can roll, and is formed with an outer rail member 18 and an inner rail member 19 for guiding game balls launched from the launching device to the game area 7. The gaming area 7 is also provided with a gate member 20 through which gaming balls can pass, a first starting opening 21 through which gaming balls can enter, a stage 17 to facilitate entry into the first starting opening 21, a second starting opening 22 through which gaming balls can enter, a regular winning opening 23 through which gaming balls can enter, a big winning opening 24 through which gaming balls can enter when a winning game (described below) is being played, an outlet 25 for discharging gaming balls that do not enter any of the winning openings outside the gaming area (to a gaming ball discharge gutter), a movable body 28 that can move up and down, and other components such as gaming nails (not shown) and a windmill.

The play area 7 has a play area 7a formed to the left of the center (a play area for so-called "left-handed hits") and a play area 7b formed to the right of the center (a play area for so-called "right-handed hits").

The gate member 20 is located in the right center of the play area 7, allowing game balls to pass through when a so-called "right hit" is performed, in which the game ball is launched to the right side of the play area 7. It is also always open upward, allowing game balls to pass through at all times. When a game ball passes through the gate member 20 and is detected by the gate detection SW 20a, the "passing gate detection processing" described below is performed, and a "normal symbol hit determination processing" is performed to determine whether or not to protrude the protruding member (not shown) located in the second starting hole 22. After the normal symbol change time has elapsed, a "normal symbol change game" is executed, in which the determination result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is derived. The gate member 20 may also be located in the left center of the play area 7.

When a normal symbol variation game based on passing through gate member 20 is being played, if a game ball passes through gate member 20 again, the execution of the normal symbol variation game based on that passage will be put on hold, and up to four games can be put on hold, excluding the normal symbol variation game that is being played. Specifically, a reserved memory area for the normal symbol changing game is provided in the main RAM 103. As shown in FIG. 9, this reserved memory area is composed of a "change memory area" corresponding to the currently changing normal symbol changing game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the normal symbol changing game that will be played after the currently changing normal symbol changing game has ended, and then a "second memory area," a "third memory area," and a "fourth memory area." When the currently changing normal symbol changing game has ended, the determination information (random number value) stored in the "first memory area" is moved to the "change memory area," the determination information (random number value) stored in the "second memory area" is moved to the "first memory area," the determination information (random number value) stored in the "third memory area" is moved to the "second memory area," the determination information (random number value) stored in the "fourth memory area" is moved to the "third memory area," and the "fourth memory area" becomes empty.

The first starting hole 21 is located in the center of the play area 7. When a game ball is launched to the left side of the play area 7, a so-called "left shot," the game ball can enter the hole. When a so-called "right shot" is performed, the game ball cannot enter the hole. It is also always open at the top, allowing game balls to enter at all times. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 and is detected by the first starting hole detection SW21a, for example, a "3" game ball is paid out as a prize ball. If there are any free reserved memory areas other than the prize balls, a special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image described below are displayed in a variable manner. After the variable time has elapsed, the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol and decorative symbol) is derived (determined display), and a "pattern change game" is executed.

If a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while a symbol change game based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21 is being played, the execution of the symbol change game based on that ball entry will be put on hold, and up to four symbol change games can be put on hold, excluding the symbol change game currently being played.

Specifically, a reserved memory area for the symbol change game is provided in main RAM 103. As shown in FIG. 9, this reserved memory area is composed of a "relevant change memory area" corresponding to the currently changing symbol change game, a "first memory area" corresponding to the symbol change game that will be played after the currently changing symbol change game has ended, and the following three areas: a "second memory area," a "third memory area," and a "fourth memory area." When the currently changing symbol change game has ended with determination information (random number values) stored in all reserved memory areas, the determination information (random number values) stored in the "first memory area" is transferred to the "relevant change memory area," the determination information (random number values) stored in the "second memory area" is transferred to the "first memory area," the determination information (random number values) stored in the "third memory area" is transferred to the "second memory area," and the determination information (random number values) stored in the "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "third memory area," and the "fourth memory area" becomes empty. Note that the first starting opening 21 is an entrance through which the game ball can enter, but it may also be configured as a passage area through which the game ball can pass.

A starting hole light-emitting device 21a is also provided around the first starting hole 21. When a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21, the starting hole light-emitting device 21a emits light to indicate that the ball has entered. When the hold-ahead display described below is performed, the starting hole light-emitting device 21a can emit light in the same color as the hold icon (or the variable icon) that is the target of the hold-ahead display. This allows the color of the hidden hold icon (or the variable icon) to be recognized from the light emitted by the starting hole light-emitting device 21a, even if the hold icon (or the variable icon) is temporarily hidden (e.g., during a super reach). While the starting hole light-emitting device 21a is capable of emitting light in the same color as the hold icon (or the variable icon) when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21, it may also emit light in the same color as the hold icon (or the variable icon) when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22.

The second starting hole 22 is located in the right center of the game area 7, and is capable of accepting game balls when a so-called "right-hand shot" is performed, in which the game ball is launched to the right side of the game area 7, but is not capable of accepting game balls when a so-called "left-hand shot" is performed. Furthermore, unlike the first starting hole 21, the second starting hole 22 is not always open upward, and in principle does not allow game balls to enter (it is in a "closed" state). In other words, the second starting hole 22 has a protruding member that can protrude forward, and only when this protruding member protrudes forward (when it is in an "open" state) is it capable of accepting game balls.

Regarding whether or not the protruding member is protruded forward to allow a game ball to enter, if a normal symbol win is determined in the normal symbol win determination process, it can be opened or closed in the opening/closing mode shown in "Opening/Closing of Second Start Gate" in Figure 6, which will be described later. When a game ball enters the second start gate 22 and is detected by the second start gate detection SW22a, for example, a "2" game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and if any reserved memory area is empty in addition to the prize ball, a symbol change game is executed.

If a game ball enters the second start port 22 while a symbol change game based on a ball entering the second start port 22 is being played, the execution of the symbol change game based on that ball entry is put on hold, and up to four symbols can be put on hold, excluding the symbol change game currently being played. The specific configuration of the main RAM 103 related to the hold is the same as that of the first start port 21 described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Note that, while a protruding member that can move back and forth is used as the second starting opening 22, a so-called "electric tulip" with movable wings may also be used. Also, while the second starting opening 22 is an entrance through which game balls can enter, it may also be configured as a passage area through which game balls can pass.

In addition, in this embodiment, the series of steps in which a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22, the special symbol hit determination process is performed, the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image are displayed in a variable manner, and the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) is derived (determined display) after the variation time has elapsed is sometimes referred to as a "symbol variation game" or simply as a "single variation game." Furthermore, the period during which the "symbol variation game" is being played may sometimes be referred to as a "variation display."

Furthermore, when a single gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21, a "pattern change game" based on the entry of the single gaming ball is executed on the first special symbol display device 27a and the image display device 26, and when a single gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22, a "pattern change game" based on the entry of the single gaming ball is executed on the second special symbol display device 27b and the image display device 26. Therefore, "pattern change game" refers collectively to games played between the first special symbol display device 27a and the image display device 26, and to games played between the second special symbol display device 27b and the image display device 26.

In addition, in this embodiment, the derivation of the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process (special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image) after the change time in the symbol change game has elapsed is referred to as the "confirmed display" (of the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image). A "confirmed display" is a state in which the special symbol, decorative symbol image, and fourth symbol image have completely stopped. On the other hand, in a symbol change game, temporarily stopping a decorative symbol image before the change time has elapsed is referred to as a "temporary stop display" of the decorative symbol image. Examples of a "temporary stop display" include the left and right decorative symbol images when a "reach" is reached, as described below, when a special symbol marked "pseudo" is being derived, which suggests the execution of a pseudo-consecutive win, as described below, and the "swing change display" before the "confirmed display." A "fluctuating display" before a "confirmed display" is, for example, a variable display that occurs at a branching point where the decorative pattern image is "temporarily stopped" at, for example, "767" and then "confirmedly displayed" as "767", or where a losing "767" is temporarily "temporarily stopped" and a reversal effect is performed to derive "777" and then "confirmedly displayed" as "777".

There are four regular winning slots 23, three on the lower left and one on the lower right of the game area 7. The three regular winning slots 23 on the lower left are designed to accept game balls when a so-called "left-handed" shot is being played (but not when a "right-handed" shot is being played), while the one regular winning slot 23 on the lower right is designed to accept game balls when a so-called "right-handed" shot is being played (but not when a "left-handed" shot is being played). Like the first starting slot 21, the regular winning slots 23 are always open upward, allowing game balls to enter at all times. When a game ball enters a regular winning slot 23 and is detected by the regular winning slot detection SW 23a, for example, eight game balls are paid out as prize balls. The locations of the regular winning slots 23 can be freely changed, and the number of regular winning slots 23 may be fewer than four. Additionally, the number of prize balls may be different between the "3" regular winning slots 23 on the lower left and the "1" regular winning slot 23 on the lower right.

The large prize opening 24 is located in the lower right part of the play area 7, and is capable of receiving game balls when a so-called "right-handed hit" is being performed (no balls can enter when a "left-handed hit" is being performed). The large prize opening 24 has an opening/closing door, and when a win is determined in the special symbol hit determination process, a winning game is executed and the opening/closing door tilts forward, allowing the game ball to enter. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 24 and is detected by the large prize opening detection SW 24a, for example, "12" game balls are paid out as prize balls.

During a winning game, the door of the special prize opening 24 opens (tilts forward) for the number of rounds (R) shown in Figure 6. It opens (tilts forward) for 29.5 seconds (S = seconds) per round. If the special prize opening detection SW 24a detects that 10 game balls have entered the game before 29.5 seconds have passed, the door closes and the game proceeds to the next round, even if 29.5 seconds have not yet passed. This process is repeated for the specified number of rounds. On the other hand, if 29.5 seconds pass before the special prize opening detection SW 24a detects that 10 game balls have entered the game (so-called "attacker full open"), the door closes and the game proceeds to the next round. In this case, the player is at a disadvantage because one round of play ends before the specified number of balls entered per round, 10, is reached.

In this embodiment, a door that tilts forward is used as the big prize opening 24, but a so-called "electric tulip" or a "shutter member" that moves back and forth may also be used. Furthermore, the game area 7 may have multiple big prize openings.

The image display device 26 has a display area covering almost the entire area, is positioned higher than the stage 17, and is capable of displaying a symbol change game and effect images in the display area. In other words, when a game ball lands in the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22 and a special symbol hit determination process is performed, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are changed (vertical scrolled) in the variable display area. Note that whether the game ball lands in the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22, the left decorative symbol image 26a, the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the right decorative symbol image 26c are changed (vertical scrolled) in the variable display area (although the special symbol display device is different, the decorative symbol images used in the image display device 26 are the same).

Then, within the variable time, a presentation image is displayed, and once the variable time has elapsed, if there is a win, for example, a "7" will stop on each decorative pattern image, and the decorative pattern combination of "777" will be displayed as a confirmed win, thereby informing the player that there is a win. On the other hand, if there is a loss, for example, a decorative pattern combination of "765" will be displayed as a confirmed win, thereby informing the player that there is a loss.

In addition to each decorative pattern image, a fourth pattern image 26d (the "fourth" pattern following the above-mentioned left decorative pattern image 26a, center decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c) can be displayed in the lower right corner of the display area, allowing for variable and confirmed displays in synchronization with each decorative pattern image. The image display device 26 also displays a first start port reserved ball number image 26e, which displays the number of reserved balls for the pattern change game in the first start port 21 from "0" to "4," a second start port reserved ball number image 26f, which displays the number of reserved balls for the pattern change game in the second start port 22 from "0" to "4," and a first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, a first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, and a first start port third reserved ball image display area 26f, which display the number of reserved balls for the pattern change game in the first start port 21 using reserved ball images. i, first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (shown simply as "g," "h," "i," and "j" in FIG. 4), second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, and second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (shown simply as "k," "l," "m," and "n" in FIG. 4), which display the number of reserved balls for the symbol change game in second start port 22 using reserved ball images. In addition, a variable icon display area 26o (shown simply as "o" in FIG. 4), which displays an icon image corresponding to the symbol change game currently being played, can be displayed.

The number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port reserved ball number image 26e is synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, and the number of reserved balls displayed in the second start port reserved ball number image 26f is synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k through the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n. For example, if "4" is displayed in the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, "4" reserved ball images will be displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.

The number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed as the second start port reserved ball number image 26f may be referred to as "numeric reserved balls" below. Furthermore, the reserved ball images displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, and the reserved ball images displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, and the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n may be referred to as "reserved icons" below. Furthermore, the icon image displayed in the variable icon display area 26o may be referred to as the "variable icon" below. Furthermore, the variable icons and reserved icons may be collectively referred to simply as "icons."

The variable icon display area 26o, first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, and second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n are displayed on the image display device 26, but are not limited to this and may be displayed on LEDs, lamps, etc., or on a display device separate from the image display device 26 (for example, a second image display device, a so-called "sub-LCD").

The left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, right decorative pattern image 26c, and fourth pattern image 26d can display pattern images from "1" to "8," and if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a hit, any of the following pattern combinations can be displayed: "111," "222," "333," "444," "555," "666," "a77," or "888."

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, it is possible to display symbol combinations other than those mentioned above. If the result is a miss, and a special symbol change pattern accompanied by a "reach" is determined in the special symbol change patterns described below, a symbol combination such as "767" will be displayed as confirmed, and if a special symbol change pattern not accompanied by a "reach" is determined, a symbol combination such as "765" will be displayed as confirmed.

The combination of symbols confirmed and displayed in the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c is the same as the combination of symbols confirmed and displayed in the fourth pattern image 26d. For example, if "777" is confirmed and displayed in the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c, the fourth pattern image 26d will also confirm and display "777," and if "767" is confirmed and displayed in the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c, the fourth pattern image 26d will also confirm and display "767."

"Reach" refers to a state in which the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c display the same number image (temporary stop display), and the middle decorative pattern image 26b displays a variable display (the pattern images displayed as temporary stops and the variable display are not limited to this). In this embodiment, if the determination result of the "special pattern hit determination process" is a win, the process is configured to always go through "Reach," so it can be said that this is a state in which the player can expect to win.

In addition, the fourth pattern image 26d may not be a combination of the above-mentioned patterns, but may simply display a single-digit number, a two-digit number, a symbol or character, or may be illuminated in different colors to distinguish between winning and losing, and the type of pattern.

The symbol display device 27 is provided outside the play area (outside the outer rail member 18), which is an area of the play board 6 that is different from the play area 7. As shown in FIG. 4, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a first special symbol display 27a, whose display is controlled by the main control board 100, that executes a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21, and a second special symbol display 27b that executes a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22. The first special symbol display 27a and the second special symbol display 27b are configured as 7-segment displays, and in the symbol change game, the special symbol flashes "-" (horizontal bar symbol) from the start of the change. When the timing arrives for deriving the result of the special symbol hit determination process, if there is a miss, the "-" (horizontal bar symbol) is lit (confirmed display), and if there is a win, for example, a "7" is lit (confirmed display). In other words, "special symbols" refer to symbols whose display is controlled by the main control board 100.

In this embodiment, the "special pattern" and the above-mentioned left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, right decorative pattern image 26c, and fourth pattern image 26d may be simply referred to as "patterns" or "identification information." Furthermore, the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c, which are managed by the performance control board 200, may be simply referred to as "decorative patterns." Furthermore, the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, right decorative pattern image 26c, and fourth pattern image 26d, which are managed by the performance control board 200, may be collectively referred to as "sub-patterns."

As shown in Figure 4, the symbol display device 27 is provided with a first special symbol reserve indicator 27c, which is display-controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of reserved symbols for the symbol change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21, and a second special symbol reserve indicator 27d, which displays the number of reserved symbols for the symbol change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d each consist of two dot LED indicators, which can display the number of reserved balls by turning them off, on, or blinking. For example, when the number of reserved balls is "0", both dot LED indicators are "off", when the number of reserved balls is "1", one is "on" and the other is "off", when the number of reserved balls is "2", both are "on", when the number of reserved balls is "3", one is "on" and the other is "blinking", and when the number of reserved balls is "4", both are "blinking".

The first special pattern reserved ball indicator 27c is generally synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (except in the event of a command error, etc.), and the second special pattern reserved ball indicator 27d is generally synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed as the second start port reserved ball number image 26f and the number of reserved balls displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k through the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (except in the event of a command error, etc.). For example, if both first special pattern reserved ball indicators 27c are "flashing" (if there are four reserved balls), "4" will be displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, and "4" reserved ball images will be displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d may be referred to as the "main reserved indicators."

Note that the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c and the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d are each configured with two dot LED indicators, but this is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 may be provided, and the display may be displayed on that liquid crystal display device.

As shown in Figure 4, the symbol display device 27 is also provided with a normal symbol display 27e, whose display is controlled by the main control board 100 and which executes a normal symbol variation game based on the passage of a gaming ball through the gate member 20. The normal symbol display 27e is composed of two dot LED displays, and in the normal symbol variation game, from the start of variation, it repeatedly switches one on and the other off, and then switches one off and the other on. When it is time to derive the result of the normal symbol win determination process, if there is a loss, a confirmation display is made by turning one on and the other off, and if there is a normal symbol win, a confirmation display is made by turning one off and the other on.

The symbol display device 27 is also provided with a normal symbol reserve indicator 27f, which is display controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol variation game based on the passage of a gaming ball through the gate member 20. The normal symbol reserve indicator 27f is composed of two dot LED displays, similar to the first special symbol reserve indicator 27c and second special symbol reserve indicator 27d described above, and displays the number of reserved symbols in the same manner, so a detailed description will be omitted.

The symbol display device 27 is also provided with a round indicator 27g, which is controlled by the main control board 100 and displays the "number of rounds" (see Figure 6), indicating the number of times the large prize slot 24 will be opened during the winning game described above. The round indicator 27g is composed of two dot LED indicators, one for 5 rounds and one for 10 rounds. For example, if a win occurs with special symbol A, the LED indicator for 10 rounds will light up and the others will be extinguished, and if a win occurs with special symbol B, the LED indicator for 5 rounds will light up and the others will be extinguished.

The game board 6 is provided with multiple board lighting devices 29 (e.g., full-color LEDs), which, when the power is on to the pachinko game machine 1, emit light in a predetermined light pattern, enhancing the decorativeness of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, as shown by reference numeral 29 in Figure 3, the board lighting devices 29 can decorate the entire game area 7 of the game board 6. Furthermore, all of the board lighting devices 29 can be turned off to highlight the display content of the image display device 26. Furthermore, the predetermined light emission pattern is made up of multiple light emission patterns that specify the light emission speed, light emission color, and which LEDs should and should not be lit.

To the right of the image display device 26 (the so-called "center role") are provided a first special symbol sub-hold indicator 29a, a second special symbol sub-hold indicator 29b, and a right-hit indicator 29c, which are embodiments of the board lighting device 29. The first special symbol sub-hold indicator 29a and the second special symbol sub-hold indicator 29b are controlled by the performance control board 200 and each consist of two dot LED indicators, which can indicate the number of reserved balls by turning them off, on, or off. For example, when the number of reserved balls is "0," both dot LED indicators are "off," when the number of reserved balls is "1," one is "on" and the other is "off," when the number of reserved balls is "2," both are "on," when the number of reserved balls is "3," one is "on" and the other is "blinking," and when the number of reserved balls is "4," both are "blinking."

The first special pattern sub-reserve indicator 29a is generally synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e and the number of reserved balls displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (except in the event of a command error, etc.), and the second special pattern sub-reserve indicator 29b is generally synchronized with the number of reserved balls displayed as the second start port reserved ball number image 26f and the number of reserved balls displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k through the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n (except in the event of a command error, etc.). For example, if both first special pattern sub-reserve indicators 29a are "flashing" (when there are four reserved balls), "4" will be displayed as the first start port reserved ball number image 26e, and "4" reserved ball images will be displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. In the following, the first special symbol sub-hold display 29a and the second special symbol sub-hold display 29b may be referred to as the "sub-hold display."

Note that while the first special symbol sub-hold display 29a and the second special symbol sub-hold display 29b are each configured with two dot LED displays, this is not limited to this. For example, they may be displayed on a display device separate from the image display device 26 (e.g., a second image display device, a so-called "sub-LCD").

The right-hit indicator 29c is display-controlled by the performance control board 200, and lights up, for example, when an opening command is received during a winning game, or when a game state designation command (probable change) or a game state designation command (time-saving A, B) is received. This encourages the player to make right-hits. On the other hand, it is turned off during normal game play (turned off when a game state designation command (normal) is received), which encourages the player to make left-hits. Note that while the right-hit indicator 29c is turned off to encourage the player to make left-hits, a left-hit indicator may be provided and the left-hit indicator may be turned on to encourage the player to make left-hits.

Next, the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (block diagram of the control system) will be explained based on Figure 4. Note that the explanation of the configuration of the gaming board 6 in Figure 3 will be omitted where appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the rear side of the middle frame 3 with a main control board 100, a presentation control board 200, a payout control board 300, and a power supply board 400. The main control board 100 and the presentation control board 200 are connected via a harness or the like (not shown) so that only one-way communication is possible from the main control board 100 to the presentation control board 200. The main control board 100 and the payout control board 300 are also connected via a harness or the like so that two-way communication is possible. The payout control board 300 is also connected so that only one-way communication is possible from the payout control board 300 to the presentation control board 200. The power supply board 400 is connected to receive external power via a power plug (not shown) and can supply the supplied external power to all of the main control board 100, the presentation control board 200, and the payout control board 300.

The main control board 100 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to enable input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to enable display control for various displays and drive control for various solenoids. The performance control board 200 is connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to enable input from various switches, and is also connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc. to enable display control for various displays.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main CPU 101 that performs control processing related to the progress of the game, a main ROM 102 that stores the control programs necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game, and a main RAM 103 that can read and write data necessary for the control processing related to the progress of the game. Although not shown, the main control board also includes an interrupt controller circuit that issues interrupt signals to the main CPU 101, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and other components. The control processing related to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 will be described in detail later using a flowchart.

Main RAM 103 is provided with storage areas (not shown) for managing various types of information. Examples include a setting value storage area for storing setting value information, a special symbol status flag storage area for storing the status of special symbols, a game status storage area for storing the game status, a win status storage area for storing the status in a winning game, a normal symbol status flag storage area for storing the status of a normal symbol, and a normal symbol win status storage area for storing the status in a winning game with a normal symbol.

Main RAM 103 is provided with counters (see Figure 9) for managing various information (time and number of times). Examples include a time-saving game state B activation game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times a symbol-changing game has been played in the normal game state and the time-saving game state A, a time-saving game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times a symbol-changing game has been played in the time-saving game state (A, B), a probability-changing game state game number counter for counting (counting and storing) the number of times a symbol-changing game has been played in the probability-changing game state, a time management counter for managing various times, a round number counter for managing the number of rounds in a winning game, a counting and storing of the number of out balls, a counting and storing of the number of safe balls, and a limit management counter for storing the difference in the number of balls between these (number of out balls - number of safe balls).

The play count counter for activating time-saving play state B starts counting from the start of time-saving play state A after a winning play ends, and continues to hold the counter value even when time-saving play state A ends and the game transitions to the normal play state. For example, when time-saving play state A begins after a winning play ends, the counter value is "0," and when time-saving play state A ends and the game transitions to the normal play state, the counter value becomes "100." Then, if the counter value is determined to be "898 (time-saving play state 100 + normal play state 798)" in step S105-4-11-8 of the game state-specific processing described below, the processing is confirmed.

The play count counter for activating time-saving play state B may be configured to count the number of plays in the normal play state only. In other words, when time-saving play state A ends and the game transitions to the normal play state, the counter value is "0." If the counter value is determined to be "798 (normal play state 798)" in step S105-4-11-8 of the game state-specific processing described below, the processing may be configured to be affirmative.

The gate detection SW 20a is located inside the passage opening of the gate member 20 of the gaming board 6 and is a switch for detecting when a gaming ball has passed through the gate member 20. In other words, the gate detection SW 20a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the passage of a gaming ball is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which inputs the detected information, immediately controls the execution of the normal pattern variation game if the normal pattern pending indicator 27f is not executing a normal pattern variation game and no judgment information (random number value) is stored in any of the normal pattern variation memory areas through the fourth memory area. For example, if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, the execution of the normal pattern variation game is suspended. If judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area, the execution of the normal pattern variation game is not suspended.

The first start hole detection SW21a is located inside the winning hole of the first start hole 21 on the gaming board 6, and is a switch for detecting that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 21. In other words, the first start hole detection SW21a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a gaming ball is detected entering, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out three gaming balls as prize balls for the gaming ball entering the first start hole 21.

Furthermore, when input is received from the first start port detection SW21a, if the pattern change game is not being executed on either the first special pattern display 27a or the second special pattern display 27b, and if no judgment information (random number value) is stored in any of the variable memory areas for the special pattern (first start port) through the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 immediately controls to execute the pattern change game on the first special pattern display 27a; if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, for example, the main control board 100 controls to suspend the execution of the pattern change game; and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 controls not to suspend the execution of the pattern change game.

The second start hole detection SW22a is provided inside the winning hole of the second start hole 22 and is a switch for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start hole 22. In other words, the second start hole detection SW22a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out two game balls as prize balls for the game ball having entered the second start hole 22.

Furthermore, when input is received from the second start hole detection SW22a, if the pattern change game is not being executed on either the first special pattern display 27a or the second special pattern display 27b, and if no judgment information (random number value) is stored in any of the variable memory areas for the special pattern (second start hole) through the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) immediately controls to execute the pattern change game on the second special pattern display 27b; if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the third memory area, for example, the main control board 100 controls to suspend the execution of the pattern change game; and if judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the fourth memory area, the main control board 100 controls not to suspend the execution of the pattern change game.

The second start port opening/closing solenoid 22b is provided behind the second start port 22 and is a solenoid for causing the protruding member provided in the second start port 22 to perform an opening and closing operation. In other words, the second start port opening/closing solenoid 22b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a normal symbol win is determined in the normal symbol win determination process, the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the second start port opening/closing solenoid 22b to open and close in the opening/closing manner shown in "Opening and closing of second start port" in Figure 6.

The normal winning slot detection SW 23a is provided inside the normal winning slot 23 of the gaming board 6, and is a switch for detecting when a gaming ball has entered the normal winning slot 23. In other words, the normal winning slot detection SW 23a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a gaming ball has entered, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out eight gaming balls as prize balls for the gaming ball having entered the normal winning slot 23.

The large prize opening detection SW 24a is located inside the large prize opening 24 and is a switch for detecting when a game ball has entered the large prize opening 24. In other words, the large prize opening detection SW 24a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball is detected entering, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101), which has input the detected information, then performs processing to have the payout control board 300 pay out 12 game balls as prize balls for the game balls entering the large prize opening 24. The main control board 100 (main CPU 101) also transmits a large prize opening entry command to the presentation control board 200, indicating that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 24. This allows the presentation control board 200 to recognize the status of the game balls entering the large prize opening 24.

The large prize opening opening solenoid 24b is located behind or to the side of the large prize opening 24, and is a solenoid that causes the opening and closing door provided in the large prize opening 24 to open and close. In other words, the large prize opening opening solenoid 24b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) drives and controls the large prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open and close the door for the number of rounds shown in Figure 6 during a winning game.

The out detection SW 25a is located downstream of the flow path that collects game balls that enter the first start port 21 and are detected by the first start port detection SW 21a, game balls that enter the second start port 22 and are detected by the second start port detection SW 22a, game balls that enter the normal prize port 23 and are detected by the normal prize port detection SW 23a, game balls that enter the special prize port 24 and are detected by the special prize port detection SW 24a, and game balls that enter the out port 25. In other words, it is possible to detect game balls detected by these detection SWs, as well as game balls that enter the out port 25.

The out detection SW 25a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when a game ball is detected entering the game, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to grasp the number of out balls. It is also possible to provide an out detection SW at the outlet 25 and count the game balls detected by the out detection SW as the number of out balls.

When the main control board 100 receives information on the detection of game balls from the out detection SW 25a, it updates the number of out balls and the difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter described above. For example, when one game ball is detected by the out detection SW 25a, the number of out balls is incremented by "+1," and the difference in the number of balls is calculated using the updated number of out balls and the number of safe balls.
On the other hand, when information indicating that a game ball has been detected is input from the first start gate detection SW 21a, the number of safe balls in the limit management counter described above is updated. In this case, "3," which corresponds to the prize ball in the first start gate 21, is added to the number of safe balls, and the difference in balls is calculated based on the number of safe balls after the addition. Subsequently, when information indicating that a game ball has been detected is input from the second start gate detection SW 22a, "2," which corresponds to the prize ball in the second start gate 22, is added to the number of safe balls. When information indicating that a game ball has been detected is input from the normal prize gate detection SW 23a, "8," which corresponds to the prize ball in the normal prize gate 23, is added to the number of safe balls. When information indicating that a game ball has been detected is input from the special prize gate detection SW 24a, "12," which corresponds to the prize ball in the special prize gate 24, is added to the number of safe balls, and the difference in balls is calculated based on the number of safe balls after the addition.

Note that updating the difference in the number of balls using the number of balls thrown is just one example, and the difference in the number of balls may also be updated using the number of balls fired. For example, a switch capable of detecting game balls fired into the launching device 305 may be provided to count the number of balls fired, or a switch may be provided at the part of the inner rail member 19 closest to the game area 7 to count the number of balls fired.

The first special symbol display 27a is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100. It is a display for executing a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21. In other words, the first special symbol display 27a and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a when the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a are met. Note that the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the first special symbol display 27a are met when a positive judgment is made in the processing of step S105-2-4 in the "Special Symbol Change Start Processing" (see Figure 21) described below.

The second special symbol display 27b is provided in the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100. It is a display for executing a symbol change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22. In other words, the second special symbol display 27b and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b when the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b are met. Note that the execution conditions for the symbol change game on the second special symbol display 27b are met when a positive judgment is made in the processing of step S105-2-1 in the "Special Symbol Change Start Processing" (see Figure 21).

The first special symbol reserve indicator 27c is provided on the symbol display device 27 and is display-controlled by the main control board 100. It is an indicator for displaying the number of reserved symbols for the symbol change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21. In other words, the first special symbol reserve indicator 27c and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the first starting hole detection SW21a, it controls the display of the first special symbol reserve indicator 27c (changing from off to on, or from on to flashing) if the upper limit of reserved symbols (4) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the symbol change game based on a game ball entering the currently changing first starting hole 21 ends, it controls the display of the first special symbol reserve indicator 27c (changing from flashing to on, or from on to off).

The second special symbol reserve indicator 27d is provided on the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100. It is an indicator for displaying the number of reserved symbols for the symbol change game based on a game ball entering the second start hole 22. In other words, the second special symbol reserve indicator 27d and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the second start hole detection SW22a, it controls the display of the second special symbol reserve indicator 27d (changing from off to on, or from on to flashing) if the upper limit of reserved symbols (4) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the symbol change game based on a game ball entering the currently changing second start hole 22 ends, it controls the display of the second special symbol reserve indicator 27d (changing from flashing to on, or from on to off).

The normal symbol display 27e is provided in the symbol display device 27 and is a display for executing a normal symbol variation game whose display is controlled by the main control board 100. In other words, the normal symbol display 27e and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) controls the display of the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e when the conditions for executing the normal symbol variation game on the normal symbol display 27e are met.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 27f is provided on the symbol display device 27, and is display-controlled by the main control board 100. It is an indicator for displaying the number of reserved symbols for the normal symbol variation game based on the passage of a gaming ball through the gate member 20. In other words, the normal symbol reserve indicator 27f and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and when the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) receives information that a gaming ball has been detected from the gate detection SW 20a, it controls the display of the normal symbol reserve indicator 27f (changing from off to on, or from on to flashing) if the upper limit of reserved symbols (4) has not been reached. On the other hand, when the currently varying normal symbol variation game ends, it controls the display of the normal symbol reserve indicator 27f (changing from flashing to on, or from on to off).

The round indicator 27g is provided on the symbol display device 27, and is controlled by the main control board 100 to display the number of times the large prize slot 24 is opened during the winning game described above. In other words, the round indicator 27g and the main control board 100 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and, for example, when a symbol change game determined to be a winning game in the special symbol winning determination process ends and a special symbol indicating a winning game (e.g., "7") is displayed on the first special symbol display 27a, the round indicator 27g controls the lighting of the LED indicator for the number of rounds corresponding to the determined winning game. Then, while a winning game is being played, the round indicator 27g continues to be controlled to be lit, and when the winning game ends, the round indicator 27g is controlled to be turned off.

The magnetic sensors 27h are provided at multiple locations on the gaming board 6 and are sensors for detecting magnetism. In other words, the magnetic sensors 27h and the main control board 100 are connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc., and if, for example, an abnormal magnetic field exceeding a predetermined value is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect abnormal magnetic fields. When an abnormal magnetic field is detected, information indicating the detection of the abnormal magnetic field (a magnetic abnormality error designation command) is sent to the performance control board 200. This makes it possible to issue an alert that an abnormal magnetic field has been detected.

Radio wave sensors 27i are provided at multiple locations on the gaming board 6 and are sensors for detecting radio waves. In other words, the radio wave sensors 27i and the main control board 100 are connected via harnesses, relay boards, etc., and if, for example, an abnormal radio wave exceeding a predetermined value is detected, the detected information is input to the main control board 100. This allows the main control board 100 to detect abnormal radio waves. Then, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, information indicating the detection of the abnormal radio wave (a radio wave abnormality error designation command) is sent to the performance control board 200. This makes it possible to issue a notification that an abnormal radio wave has been detected.

The performance control board 200 is provided with a performance control unit 200a, which has a sub-CPU 201 that performs performance control processing, a sub-ROM 202 that stores the control programs required for the performance control processing, and a sub-RAM 203 that can read and write data required for the performance control processing. Also provided is an image/sound control unit 200b that is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like to enable two-way communication. The image/sound control unit 200b has an image/sound CPU 204 that performs image/sound control processing, a sound ROM 205 that stores sound data, a CG ROM 206 that stores image data, and a VRAM 207 with a frame buffer that stores image generation data, etc. In addition, there is provided a light emission drive control unit 200c that is connected to the performance control unit 200a via a harness or the like to enable two-way communication. The light emission drive control unit 200c has a light emission drive CPU 208 that performs light emission control processing and drive control processing, a light emission drive ROM 209 that stores the control programs required for the light emission control processing and drive control processing, and a light emission drive RAM 210 that can read and write data required for the light emission control processing and drive control processing.

The effect control unit 200a is also connected so that operation information from the effect button detection SW14a, the effect lever detection SW15a, and the cross key detection SW16a can be input.

The effect button detection SW 14a is provided on the effect button 14 and is a switch for detecting that the effect button 14 has been pressed by a player when the effect button 14 is in its valid operation period. In other words, the effect button detection SW 14a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed is input to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200, which has received the information indicating that the effect button 14 has been pressed, then controls the effect corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 14 via the image display device 26 and speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol-changing game, the effect button 14 has a valid operation period set for a predetermined period of time, and the effect button detection SW 14a only detects presses when the valid operation period is set.

The effect lever detection SW 15a is provided on the effect lever 15 and is a switch for detecting that the effect lever 15 has been operated by the player when the effect lever 15 is in its valid operation period. In other words, the effect lever detection SW 15a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200, which has input the information indicating that the effect lever 15 has been operated, then controls the effects corresponding to the operation of the effect lever 15 via the image display device 26 and speaker 10. Here, for example, in a symbol-changing game, the effect lever 15 has a valid operation period set for a predetermined period of time, and the effect lever detection SW 15a only detects operation when the valid operation period is set.

The cross key detection SW 16a is provided on the cross key button 16 and is a switch for detecting when the cross key button 16 is pressed by the player. In other words, the cross key detection SW 16a and the effect control board 200 are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and information indicating that the cross key button 16 has been operated is input to the effect control board 200.

As described above, by operating the cross key button 16, the amount of light emitted from the light-emitting device 9, the amount of light emitted from the image display device 26, and the volume emitted from the speaker 10 can be adjusted. Specifically, pressing the up button on the cross key button 16 increases the amount of light (in stages), pressing the down button on the cross key button 16 decreases the amount of light (in stages), pressing the right button on the cross key button 16 increases the volume (in stages), and pressing the left button on the cross key button 16 decreases the volume (in stages).

The light intensity may be set to three levels: "strong," "medium," and "weak," or may be further subdivided into five levels. The volume may be set to three levels: "high," "medium," and "low," or may be further subdivided into five levels. Furthermore, the image display device 26 may display a level gauge image indicating the degree of adjustment of the light intensity or volume, and the speaker 10 may emit an adjustment sound corresponding to the level. For example, if the volume adjustment level is configured to five levels, the adjustment sound corresponding to the lowest volume value level 1 may be "Do," the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 2 may be "Re," the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 3 may be "Mi," the adjustment sound corresponding to volume value level 4 may be "Fa," and the adjustment sound corresponding to the highest volume value level 5 may be "So." The adjustment sound may be output at a volume value corresponding to the volume value level. For example, "Re" may be output at a louder volume than "Do."

The level gauge image may be displayed in a manner that corresponds to the level of light intensity or volume, or in a constant manner regardless of the level of light intensity or volume. Specifically, a display manner that corresponds to the level of light intensity or volume means, for example, displaying the size (display area) of the level gauge image indicating volume level 2, which is a volume value greater than volume level 1, larger than the size (display area) of the level gauge image indicating volume level 1. On the other hand, a constant display manner regardless of the level of light intensity or volume means displaying the size (display area) of the level gauge image as the same whether the volume is at volume level 1 or volume level 2.

The adjustment sound corresponding to the volume level may be set to, for example, a "beep" sound at any level, with the volume value being different for each level. Specifically, when the volume is at volume level 1, a "beep" sound is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 1, and when the volume is at volume level 2, a "beep" sound is emitted at a volume value corresponding to volume level 2 (a volume value higher than volume level 1).

In this embodiment, adjustments to the light intensity and volume can be made when the symbol change game is not being played, but they may also be made when the symbol change game is being played. In this case, it is preferable to adjust the level gauge image without displaying it and without emitting the adjustment sound, or to display it in a small size and output the adjustment sound at a low volume. This prevents the level gauge image and adjustment sound from interfering with the effect images and sound corresponding to the symbol change game.

It may also be possible to adjust the light intensity and volume while a winning game is being played. In this case, the display of the level gauge image and the output of the adjusted sound may be controlled in the same way as when the light intensity and volume are adjusted when the pattern change game is not being played, or the display of the level gauge image and the output of the adjusted sound may be controlled in the same way as when the light intensity and volume are adjusted when the pattern change game is being played.

Note that while the above-mentioned level gauge image is displayed on the image display device 26, if a display device other than the image display device 26 is provided, the image may be displayed on that other display device. This prevents the display content displayed on the image display device 26 from being obstructed by the display of the level gauge image.

When the light intensity is adjusted, the level gauge image may be displayed, but the adjustment sound may not be output.

An image display device 26 is connected to the image/sound control unit 200b, allowing the image information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b to be displayed. A speaker 10 is also connected to the image/sound control unit 200b, allowing the sound information generated by the image/sound control unit 200b to be output.

The speaker 10 is capable of outputting music (BGM), voice, and sound effects. For example, if closed state information is not input from the frame open detection SW3a (described below), it outputs an alarm sound indicating that the inner frame 3 is in the open state. In other words, the speaker 10 and the image/sound control unit 200b are connected via a harness, relay board, etc., and the above-mentioned sounds are output from the speaker 10 under the control of the image/sound control unit 200b.

The light-emitting device 9, starting port light-emitting device 21a, and board lighting device 29 are connected to the light-emitting drive control unit 200c, and light emission can be controlled by the light-emitting drive control unit 200c. The board drive unit 30 is also connected to the light-emitting drive control unit 200c, and the movable body 28 can be driven and controlled via the board drive unit 30.

The movable body 28 is mounted on the game board 6 and is capable of performing actions such as "dropping," "swinging," and "rotating." Performing these actions indicates the possibility of winning a game.

Furthermore, when the movable body 28 receives a power-related subcommand, it performs an initial operation in front of the display area of the image display device 26 to check whether the above-mentioned operations such as "drop," "swing," and "rotation" are operating normally. This initial operation involves the movable body 28 moving to the front of the display area of the image display device 26, and therefore the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see for a certain period of time due to the movable body 28. Note that even if the display content displayed in the display area becomes difficult to see due to the initial operation, other components (e.g., starting port light-emitting device 21a, first special symbol hold indicator 27c, second special symbol hold indicator 27d, board lighting device 29, etc.) do not become difficult to see due to the initial operation of the movable body 28.

In addition to these, although not shown in the figure, it also includes an interrupt controller circuit that issues an interrupt signal to the sub-CPU 201, a hardware random number generation circuit that generates random numbers within a certain range, and more.

The payout control board 300 is equipped with a payout CPU 301 that performs payout control processing, a payout ROM 302 that stores the control program required for the payout control processing, and a payout RAM 303 that can read and write data required for the payout control processing. A payout device 304 is also connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the payout device 304, game balls are paid out into the upper tray 5a.

Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives information that a game ball has been detected from the first start hole detection SW21a, the main control board 100 sends a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 to pay out three prize balls. The payout control board 300 then controls the payout device 304 to pay out three prize balls into the upper tray 5a. Once the three prize balls have been paid out, the payout control board 300 sends a payout completion signal to the main control board 100, completing the payout of the game balls in response to the input of information that a game ball has been detected from the first start hole detection SW21a.

The payout control board 300 is also connected to the launch handle 8 via a harness or the like, and when the player touches the handle touch sensor provided on the launch handle 8, information that the launch handle 8 is being held is input, and the amount of rotation of the launch handle 8 is input by the amount of the launch volume (not shown) provided on the launch handle 8.

In addition, a launching device 305 is connected to the payout control board 300 via a harness or the like, and by controlling the launching device 305, gaming balls are launched into the gaming area 7. Specifically, when the payout control board 300 receives input from the launch handle 8 that the player is holding the launching handle 8 and the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8, it controls the launching device 305 to launch gaming balls with a launch strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the launching handle 8.

Also, although not shown in Figure 4, the payout control board 300 is connected so as to receive an input signal from the ball lending button 12 shown in Figure 1 via a ball lending unit or the like. When the ball lending button 12 is operated by a player, the payout control board 300 controls the payout device 304 to pay out the number of game balls (e.g., 125 balls) corresponding to one operation of the ball lending button 12 into the upper tray 5a.

The frame open detection SW3a is located on the middle frame 3 and can detect an "open" state, such as when the glass frame 4 is open, when the glass frame 4 and middle frame 3 are open, or when the middle frame 3 is open, and a "closed" state, such as when the glass frame 4 and middle frame 3 are closed. In other words, the frame open detection SW3a and the payout control board 300 are connected via a harness or relay board, and when the "closed" state described above is in effect, information indicating the closed state is input to the payout control board 300. On the other hand, when the "open" state is in effect, information indicating the closed state described above is not input to the payout control board 300. This lack of input allows the payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) to detect the "open" state described above. The payout control board 300 (payout CPU 301) can transmit information indicating the "closed" state and information indicating the "open" state to the performance control board 200.

A passage is formed between the upper tray 5a and the lower tray 5b to guide game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 5a to the lower tray 5b, and a full tank detection SW 300a is provided in this passage. If game balls guided to the lower tray 5b are stored without being discharged (outside the gaming machine), the game balls will remain in the passage, and when a certain amount of game balls remain, the full tank detection SW 300a turns ON. This makes it possible to detect that the lower tray 5b is also full of game balls. When the full tank detection SW 300a turns ON, the payout CPU 301 stops the payout device 304 from paying out game balls and sends information that the full tank detection SW 300a is ON to the presentation control board 200. This allows the presentation control board 200 to issue a notification urging the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 5b.

The main control board 100, performance control board 200, and payout control board 300 are connected to the power supply board 400 via harnesses, etc., and as described above, it receives external power via a power plug (not shown) and supplies the supplied external power to the main control board 100, performance control board 200, and payout control board 300. Although not shown, the power supply board 400 is equipped with a conversion circuit, etc., that converts external power (100 volts AC) to 24 volts DC.

Next, the special symbol hit determination table and the normal symbol hit determination table will be described using Figure 5. The special symbol hit determination table in Figure 5(A) is stored in the main ROM 102. In this embodiment, six setting values can be set. Figure 5(A) shows an example of a special symbol hit determination table for setting value 1; other setting values are omitted. For example, when the setting value is set to 1, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol hit determination process by referring to the special symbol hit determination table for setting value 1 shown in (A). When the setting value is set to 6, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol hit determination process by referring to the special symbol hit determination table for setting value 6 (not shown). Furthermore, "common to the first and second start ports" indicates that the same special symbol hit determination table is referenced regardless of whether the game ball enters the first start port 21 or the second start port 22. The setting value is not limited to "6" levels and can be any value. For example, it may be "4" levels or "2" levels.

In addition, the machine may not be provided with a setting value and may only be provided with the special symbol winning determination table of Figure 5 (A) (a machine without a setting may also be provided).
Alternatively, a gaming machine may have a setting value, but only the special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 5A may be provided. That is, it is acceptable to provide only one setting value, and use the same main control board main processing contents shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 as a gaming machine with multiple setting values. Even if only one setting value is provided, it is acceptable to perform the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 14 and the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 15. This allows the processing to be standardized between a gaming machine with multiple setting values (a setting-equipped machine) and a gaming machine with only one setting value (effectively a setting-unequipped machine), thereby reducing the developer's workload.
Furthermore, when a single-stage setting value is provided, there is no problem in using the same main control board 100 as in a gaming machine with multiple setting values (the hardware may also be shared). In this way, components can be shared, thereby reducing costs.

In the special symbol hit determination table of Figure 5 (A), when the game state is the normal game state and when it is in time-saving game states A and B, the probability of the special symbol hit determination process determining a hit is 1/319, and the probability of it being determined to be a miss is 318/319. When the game state is the probability variable game state, the probability of it being determined to be a hit is 1/32, and the probability of it being determined to be a miss is 31/32. In other words, when the game state is the probability variable game state, the probability of it being determined to be a hit is approximately 10 times higher than in the normal game state or time-saving game states A and B. Therefore, it can be said that the probability variable game state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state or time-saving game states A and B.

In the special symbol hit determination table for setting value "6," not shown, when the game state is the normal game state and when it is time-limited game state A or B, the probability of the special symbol hit determination process determining a hit is "1/280," and the probability of it being determined to be a miss is "279/280." When the game state is the probability variable game state, the probability of the special symbol hit determination process determining a hit is "1/28," and the probability of it being determined to be a miss is "27/28." In this way, being able to set different hit probabilities for each setting value makes it easier for the gaming parlor to manage the balls dispensed.

Furthermore, in the time-saving game states A and B and the probability variable game state, as shown in Figures 5(B) and 6(B), compared to the normal game state, it is easier to win a normal symbol in the normal symbol hit determination process, and in the event of a normal symbol hit, an advantageous opening/closing mode is selected as the opening/closing mode of the protruding member of the second starting port 22. Therefore, the probability variable game state is the most advantageous game state for the player, followed by the time-saving game states A and B, and the normal game state is the least advantageous game state for the player. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 7, the upper limit for time-saving game state A is 100 plays, and the upper limit for time-saving game state B is 1212 plays, so time-saving game state B is a more advantageous game state for the player than time-saving game state A.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the gate member 20 is located on the right side of the play area 7, not on the left side. If a right-handed hit is made in normal play mode and the game ball passes through the gate member 20, a normal win occurs at 4/256, as shown in FIG. 5, and the protruding member of the second start hole 22 can open. However, because the opening time is 0.9 seconds, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second start hole 22, and most of the shot-out game balls will pass through the outlet hole 25. Therefore, in normal play mode, the optimal gameplay for a player is to make a left-handed hit and have the game ball enter the first start hole 21. For this reason, when the gate detection SW 20a detects a game ball in normal play mode, a left-handed hit notification is issued to encourage the player to play in the optimal way.

In the following, the normal game state and time-saving game states A and B may be collectively referred to as the low probability state, and the probability variable game state may be referred to as the high probability state. The normal game state may also be referred to as the non-variable variable state or the non-variable variable state, and the probability variable game state and time-saving game states A and B may also be collectively referred to as the variable variable state, the variable variable state, or the improved winning rate state.

Next, the normal symbol hit determination table of Figure 5 (B) is stored in main ROM 102. When the game state is the normal game state, the probability of a normal symbol hit being determined in the normal symbol hit determination process is 4/256, and the probability of a normal symbol miss being determined is 252/256. When the game state is the time-saving game state A or B, or the probability variable game state, the probability of a normal symbol hit being determined in the normal symbol hit determination process is 251/256, and the probability of a normal symbol miss being determined is 5/256. Therefore, the time-saving game state A or B, or the probability variable game state, is more likely to determine a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol hit determination process than when the game state is the normal game state, making it a more advantageous game state for the player. Note that while the normal symbol hit determination table does not have a set value (although the set value is common), a set value may be set, similar to that of the special symbol hit determination table. For example, a setting value of "6" may make it easier to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol hit determination compared to a setting value of "1." Also, in the normal game state, the probability of a normal symbol being determined to be a hit in the normal symbol hit determination process is "4/256," and the probability of a normal symbol being determined to be a miss is "252/256," but this is not limited to this, and the probability of a normal symbol being determined to be a miss may also be "256/256."

Next, the special symbol determination table and the normal symbol determination table will be described using Figure 6. First, the special symbol determination table in Figure 6 (A) has two tables: (1) a table for the first starting hole 21, which is referenced when determining the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display 27a in the case of a win or a miss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process performed based on the gaming ball entering the first starting hole 21; and (2) a table for the second starting hole 22, which is referenced when determining the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the second special symbol display 27b in the case of a win or a miss as a result of the special symbol hit determination process performed based on the gaming ball entering the second starting hole 22. These tables are stored in the main ROM 102. The main CPU 101 then references the table corresponding to the starting hole into which the gaming ball entered to determine the special symbol based on the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In the special symbol determination table of (1) in Figure 6(A), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process indicates a hit, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols from "Special Symbol A," "Special Symbol B," or "Special Symbol C." Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, a random number for determining the special symbol is obtained, and one of the special symbols is determined by referring to the obtained random number for determining the special symbol. For example, if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "0 to 9," "Special Symbol A" is determined; if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "10 to 64," "Special Symbol B" is determined; and if the obtained random number for determining the special symbol is "65 to 99," "Special Symbol C" is determined. Once a special symbol is determined, the "number of rounds" and the "post-win game state" are uniquely determined. If "Special Symbol A" is determined, 10 rounds are assigned as the "number of rounds," and a special game state is assigned as the "post-win game state." If "special symbol B" is determined, 5 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds," and a special game state is awarded as the "game state after winning." If "special symbol C" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds," and a time-saving game state A is awarded as the "game state after winning." On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol win determination process is a miss, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol D," and since the "number of rounds" and "game state after winning" are not defined for "special symbol D," a winning game is not awarded.

In the special symbol determination table of (2) in Figure 6(A), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, the main CPU 101 determines one of the special symbols, "special symbol E" or "special symbol F." The specific determination method is the same as that of (1) in Figure 6(A) described above, and therefore will not be described here. If the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is between "0 and 64," "special symbol E" is determined, and if the acquired random number for determining the special symbol is between "65 and 99," "special symbol F" is determined. If "special symbol E" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds," and a special game state is awarded as the "post-win game state." If "special symbol F" is determined, 10 rounds are awarded as the "number of rounds," and time-limited game state A is awarded as the "post-win game state." On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a lose, the main CPU 101 determines "special symbol G."

As such, the probability of entering the special game state is 65% for the first start slot 21 and 65% for the second start slot 22, so there is no difference in the probability of entering the special game state between the first start slot 21 and the second start slot 22. Meanwhile, since the second start slot 22 always awards 10 rounds and never awards 5 rounds, it can be said that it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded a winning game based on a ball landing in the second start slot 22 than to be awarded a winning game based on a ball landing in the first start slot 21. While no set value is set in the special symbol determination table in this embodiment, a set value may be set. For example, the probability of determining a special symbol may be different when the set value is "1" and when the set value is "6." In this case, the probability of entering the special game state is the same for all set values, but the "number of rounds" may be set at different rates for each set value. For example, the higher the set value, "6," the more likely it is that a more advantageous number of rounds will be awarded, or the higher the set value, "1," the more likely it is that a more advantageous number of rounds will be awarded.

As such, it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded a winning game based on a ball entering the second starting hole 22 than a winning game based on a ball entering the first starting hole 21. Therefore, in time-saving game states A and B or in a special probability game state where the second starting hole 22 can be opened in 1.8S x 3 times, the optimal gameplay for the player is to hit the ball to the right and have it enter the second starting hole 22. For this reason, when the first starting hole detection SW21a detects a game ball in time-saving game states A and B or in a special probability game state, a right-hit notification is issued to encourage the player to play the game optimally.

Next, the normal symbol determination table in Figure 6 (B) is stored in the main ROM 102 and is a table referenced when determining the normal symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the normal symbol display 27e when the normal symbol hit determination process is performed based on the game ball passing through the gate member 20 and results in a normal hit or a normal miss. When the game state is the normal game state, if the normal symbol hit determination process results in a normal hit, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol A" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol-related process, and if the normal symbol misses, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol C" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol-related process when the game state is the time-limited game state A or B, or the probability variable game state, and if the normal symbol hit determination process results in a normal hit, the main CPU 101 determines "normal symbol D" in the normal symbol determination process performed in the normal symbol-related process.

As with the special symbols described above, the content of the normal symbols is also uniquely determined. When "normal symbol A" is selected, the protruding member of the second start hole 22 opens "1" time in "0.9S." When "normal symbol B" is selected, the protruding member of the second start hole 22 does not open. Furthermore, when "normal symbol C" is selected, the protruding member of the second start hole 22 opens "3" times in "1.8S." When "normal symbol D" is selected, the protruding member of the second start hole 22 does not open. Therefore, when a normal symbol wins, the opening and closing pattern of the protruding member of the second start hole 22 is more advantageous in time-limited game states A and B or in a special game state than in the normal game state, making it a more advantageous game state for the player.

Although no set values are set in the normal symbol determination table, set values may be set in the same way as in the special symbol determination table. For example, the probability of determining a normal symbol win in the normal symbol win determination process may differ for each set value, and a set value of "6" may make it easier to win compared to a set value of "1," or vice versa. Also, the opening and closing manner of the second starting port 22 may differ for each set value. For example, a set value of "6" may open and close in a more advantageous manner compared to a set value of "1," or vice versa.

Next, Figure 6 (C) shows the details of the rounds for each winning special symbol. When the number of rounds is "10" (special symbols A, C, E, F), the large prize slot 24 opens for "29.5 seconds" per round, and this is repeated 10 times. When the number of rounds is "5" (special symbol B), the large prize slot 24 opens for "29.5 seconds" per round, and this is repeated 5 times.

Next, using Figure 7, we will explain the game state transitions (game flow) in this embodiment. As mentioned above, this embodiment has a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a special game state. Strictly speaking, the time-saving game state is divided into time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

Normal game play is a low-probability state managed by the main control board, with normal power support set to "none." Normal power support means that normal symbols are more likely to be hit in the normal symbol hit determination process, and when a hit occurs, the second starting port shown in Figure 6 opens and closes "1.8S x 3 times." Additionally, the presentation control board can execute presentation modes A through E as presentation modes (also called presentation stages).

Time-saving game state A is a low-probability state managed by the main control board, and normal power support is "enabled." The maximum number of times time-saving game state A can be played is 100 times. In other words, one of the termination conditions is that 100 symbol change games have been played, and normal power support is "enabled" while 100 symbol change games have been played. Furthermore, the presentation control board can execute presentation mode F as a presentation mode.

Time-saving game state B is a low-probability state managed by the main control board, with normal power support enabled. The maximum number of times time-saving game state B can be played is 1,212. In other words, one of the conditions for ending the game is that 1,212 symbol-changing games have been played, and normal power support is enabled while 1,212 symbol-changing games are being played. Furthermore, the presentation control board can execute presentation mode G as a presentation mode.

The probability variation game state is a high probability state managed by the main control board, and normal power support is "enabled." The probability variation game state has a maximum limit of 10,000 times. In other words, one of the conditions for ending the game is that 10,000 symbol variation games have been played, and normal power support is "enabled" while 10,000 symbol variation games have been played. The effect control board can also execute effect mode H as an effect mode.

When a winning game occurs, the state managed by the main control board is a low probability state, and normal power support is set to "none."

In the time-saving gaming state A, the upper limit number of times is set to 100 times, but it may be set to less than 100 times or more than 100 times.
In addition, in the time-saving game state B, the upper limit number of times is set to 1212 times, but it may be any number as long as it is 3.8 times or less the denominator of the winning probability in the special pattern winning determination table (for example, 319).

In addition, a time-shortened game state C may be provided in addition to, or instead of, the above-mentioned time-shortened game states A and B. This time-shortened game state C is a time-shortened game state that can be entered in some cases where a win is not determined in the special symbol win determination process in the normal game state. For example, the probability of entering time-shortened game state C may be approximately 1/500. Note that any combination of time-shortened game states A, B, and C may be used. For example, a game may have time-shortened game states A and B but not time-shortened game state C, or time-shortened game states A and C but not time-shortened game state B, or time-shortened game states B and C but not time-shortened game state A, or all of time-shortened game states A, B, and C may be provided.

In addition, while an upper limit is set for the number of times a game can be played in the probability variation game state, it is not necessary to set an upper limit. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 6, a so-called probability variation loop type is used, but it may also be a so-called ST type or a drop lottery type.

Also, in the case of an ST type, it may have a special symbol that grants a high probability game state (for example, 100 STs), and a special symbol that grants a time-saving game state after the high probability game state and the end of the high probability game state (for example, 100 STs + 100 time-savings).

Next, the transition of the game state will be described.
a: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
b: This is the transition when any of the special patterns A, B, or E is determined.
c: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
d: This is the transition when either the special pattern C or F is determined.
e: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
f: This is the transition when the symbol change game is played 100 times in succession without winning.
g: This is the transition when 898 consecutive symbol change games are played without winning in the time-saving gaming state A and the normal gaming state.
h: This is the transition when the symbol change game is played 1212 times in succession without winning.
i: This is the transition when a win is determined in the special pattern win determination process.
j: This is the transition when the symbol variation game is played 10,000 times in succession without winning.

In g, the number of times is set to 898, but it may be any number of times as long as it is 2.5 times or more and 3.0 times or less the denominator of the winning probability in the special symbol winning determination table (for example, 319).
Furthermore, the number of times in g is a fixed value that cannot be changed, but it may be possible to allow an amusement store clerk to set any value.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern table will be described with reference to FIG.
The special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 8 is stored in the main ROM 102 and is a table that is referenced when determining the variation time in the symbol variation game.

When the game state is in the normal game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 101 determines one of the fluctuation patterns from "Fluctuation Pattern 1" to "Fluctuation Pattern 8." Specifically, when the game ball enters the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22, a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and one of the fluctuation patterns is determined by referring to the acquired random number for determining the fluctuation pattern. It is also possible to obtain a reach determination random number when the game ball enters the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22, and determine one of the fluctuation patterns from "Fluctuation Pattern 3" to "Fluctuation Pattern 8" if the reach determination random number corresponds to a random number that executes a reach, and to determine "Fluctuation Pattern 1" or "Fluctuation Pattern 2" if the reach determination random number does not correspond to a random number that executes a reach. On the other hand, when the game state is normal game state and the special symbol win determination process results in a win, the main CPU 101 references the random number used to determine the variation pattern and determines one of the variation patterns from "Variation Pattern 9" to "Variation Pattern 15."

Once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the "effect content" and "fluctuation time" (number of seconds, S) are determined univocally. If "fluctuation pattern 1" is determined, "shortened fluctuation" is determined as the "effect content," and "fluctuation time" is determined as "2S." "Shortened fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation that does not result in a reach and in which the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c stop simultaneously. If "fluctuation pattern 2" is determined, "normal fluctuation" is determined as the "effect content," and "fluctuation time" is determined as "7S." "Normal fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation that does not result in a reach and in which the left decorative pattern image 26a, the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c stop in that order. If "fluctuation pattern 3" is determined, "normal reach" is determined as the "effect content," and "fluctuation time" is determined as "15S." A "normal reach" is a reach that involves a reach, but does not involve any particular development effect (for example, an effect in which the middle decorative pattern image 26b changes after a temporary stop is displayed due to a loss). Because the selection rate is low when a win occurs and high when a loss occurs, it is positioned as a reach with a low expectation of a win.

If "Variation Pattern 4" is determined, "Super Reach 1" is determined as the "presentation content" and "40S" is determined as the "variation time." "Super Reach 1" refers to a reach in which a development effect is performed during the execution of a reach (normal reach), and the development result is, for example, a live-action image displayed on the image display device 26. Because the selection rate when a win occurs is higher than that of a "normal reach" and the selection rate when a loss occurs is lower than that of a "normal reach," it is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than a "normal reach." If "Variation Pattern 5" is determined, "Super Reach 2" is determined as the "presentation content" and "50S" is determined as the "variation time." "Super Reach 2" refers to a reach that develops during the execution of a reach (normal reach) and develops into a reach where, for example, a live-action image is displayed on the image display device 26. Because the selection rate when a win occurs is higher than that of a "normal reach" and the selection rate when a loss occurs is lower than that of a "normal reach," it is positioned as a reach with a higher probability of winning than a "normal reach." Note that the probability of winning may be the same as that of a "Super Reach 1," or it may be positioned as a reach with a higher probability of winning than a "Super Reach 1."

If "Variation Pattern 6" is determined, "Pseudo-Consecutive 2 Normal Reach" is determined as the "Performance Content," and "Variation Time" is determined as "30S." While "Pseudo-Consecutive 2 Normal Reach" will be explained in more detail later, "Pseudo-Consecutive 2 Normal Reach" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than "Normal Reach" alone, but a lower expectation of winning than "Super Reach 1, 2." If "Variation Pattern 7" is determined, "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 1" is determined as the "Performance Content," and "Variation Time" is determined as "70S." "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 1" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than "Super Reach 1" alone. If "Variation Pattern 8" is determined, "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 2" is determined as the "Performance Content," and "Variation Time" is determined as "80S." "Pseudo-Consecutive 3 Super Reach 2" is positioned as a reach with a higher expectation of winning than "Super Reach 2" alone. "Variation Pattern 9" to "Variation Pattern 14" differ only in whether they are a win or a miss from "Variation Pattern 3" to "Variation Pattern 8", and the presentation content and variation time are the same, so an explanation will be omitted.

If "Variation Pattern 15" is determined, "Full Rotation Reach" is determined as the "Performance Content" and "Variation Time" is determined to be "120S." A "Full Rotation Reach" is a reach in which the left decorative pattern image 26a, middle decorative pattern image 26b, and right decorative pattern image 26c are slowly scrolled (displayed changing) while aligned with "111," "222," "333," "444," "555," "666," "777," and "888," and finally, for example, "777" is displayed as the final result.

In addition, the selectable variation patterns in the event of a win may be determined by the special symbol that has been determined. For example, variation patterns 9 to 14 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A, special symbol B, or special symbol C has been determined, and variation pattern 15 may only be selected when special symbol A has been determined. Also, variation patterns 9 to 15 may be selectable regardless of whether special symbol A, special symbol B, or special symbol C has been determined.

When the game state is time-saving game state A or B, or when the game state is a probability variable game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 101 determines one of "Variation Pattern 16" to "Variation Pattern 21." If "Variation Pattern 16" is determined, "Ultra-reduced variation" is determined as the "presentation content," and "1S" is determined as the "variation time." If "Variation Pattern 17" is determined, "Reduced variation" is determined as the "presentation content," and "2S" is determined as the "variation time." Here, when the game state is time-saving game state A or B, or when the game state is a probability variable game state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss and the number of reserved balls is 1 to 3, "Ultra-reduced variation" or "Reduced variation" is more likely to be selected, thereby allowing the game to be played efficiently in time-saving game state A or B or the probability variable game state. Note that "Variation Pattern 16" may be configured to be executed only in time-saving gaming state B. This allows time-saving gaming state B, which has a higher upper limit than time-saving gaming state A, to be used efficiently.

If "Fluctuation Pattern 18" is determined, "Normal Fluctuation" is determined as the "Performance Content" and "7S" is determined as the "Fluctuation Time." If "Fluctuation Pattern 19" is determined, "Reach Provocation" is determined as the "Performance Content" and "10S" is determined as the "Fluctuation Time." "Reach Provocation" is a performance that suggests whether or not a reach will be formed by, for example, temporarily displaying a "7" symbol as the left decorative pattern image 26a and temporarily displaying a 7 symbol as the right decorative pattern image 26c. If, as a result of "Reach Provocation," for example, an 8 symbol is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, a reach will not be formed. However, if, for example, a 7 symbol is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, a reach will be formed, and this will develop into a "Variable Short Medium Super Reach" in "Fluctuation Patterns 20" to "Fluctuation Patterns 23" described below.

If "Variation Pattern 20" is selected, "Super Reach 1 during Shortened Play" is selected as the "Presentation Content" and "30S" is selected as the "Variation Time." "Super Reach 1 during Shortened Play" is a "Super Reach" exclusive to time-limited play and special play states, and is different from "Super Reach 1, 2" that are used in normal play.

If "Variation Pattern 21" is determined, "Variation Pattern 2 Super Reach" is determined as the "effect" and "40S" is determined as the "fluctuating time." Note that "Variation Pattern 2 Super Reach" may have the same expected win probability as "Variation Pattern 1 Super Reach," or it may be positioned as a reach with a higher expected win probability than "Variation Pattern 1 Super Reach." Since "Variation Pattern 22" and "Variation Pattern 23" differ only in whether they are hit or miss, and have the same effect and fluctuation time as "Variation Pattern 20" and "Variation Pattern 21," their explanations are omitted. If "Variation Pattern 24" is determined, "Sudden Win" is determined as the "effect" and "Fluctuating Time" is determined as "20S." A "sudden win" is an effect in which "777" is displayed as a temporary stop immediately, without going through a reach, and then the number is displayed as a confirmed number. Note that "Variation Pattern 24" may be executed only in time-shortened game state B. This allows time-saving gaming state B, which has a higher upper limit than time-saving gaming state A, to be used efficiently.

The above-mentioned special symbol variation patterns are not limited to those shown in Figure 8, and multiple special symbol variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, the special symbol variation pattern table referenced may differ depending on the setting value. For example, a special symbol variation pattern that is easy to select for each setting value may be provided, or a special symbol variation pattern that can only be selected with that setting value may be provided. This allows the player to guess (or understand) the setting value from the presentation of the executed special symbol variation pattern, leading to increased interest in the game.

In addition, while the special symbol variation pattern table referenced in time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B is the same, it may be different. This can give the player the feeling that different game states are being played, even though they are in the same time-saving game state.

Next, (A) the determination information storage area of the main RAM and (B) the counter of the main RAM will be described with reference to FIG.
9A is a schematic diagram showing the determination information storage area (reserved storage area) and the counter of the main RAM provided in the main RAM 103. The main RAM 103 is provided with (A) a reserved storage area corresponding to special symbols and (B) a reserved storage area corresponding to normal symbols. In the first start opening 21, determination information (random number values) related to special symbols can be stored in the "variable storage area,""first storage area,""second storage area,""third storage area," and "fourth storage area," respectively. In the second start opening 22, determination information (random number values) related to special symbols can be stored in the "variable storage area,""first storage area,""second storage area,""third storage area," and "fourth storage area," respectively. In the gate member 20, determination information (random number values) related to normal symbols can be stored in the "variable storage area,""first storage area,""second storage area,""third storage area," and "fourth storage area," respectively. Note that the counter of the main RAM is as described above, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, we will explain the commands sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200 based on Figures 10 and 11. Note that Figures 10 and 11 only show the main commands, and some commands are not shown.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved first special symbols, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when the number of reserved first special symbols increases or decreases.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved second special symbols, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when the number of reserved second special symbols increases or decreases.

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type of special symbol that will be displayed in a static state. When various special symbols are determined and the display of the special symbols begins, the command is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the effect control board 200.

The "special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when the display of the special symbol variation begins on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b.

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that a special symbol has been statically displayed, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when a special symbol is statically displayed on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that a normal symbol has been displayed in a static state. When a normal symbol is displayed in a static state on the normal symbol display 27e, it is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200.

The "game count display update command" indicates the number of pattern change games from the predetermined timing described above, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when a special pattern is displayed in a static state on the first special pattern display device 27a or the second special pattern display device 27b.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the image display device 26 displays the game count image 26q (see FIG. 54, etc.). For example, when the performance control board 200 receives a power-on command, a power-restore command, or a winning game ending command, it performs processing to display "0" as the game count image 26q, and thereafter, when one symbol-changing game is executed and a "game count display update command" is received, it performs processing to update and display the game count image 26q (by adding one).
This makes it possible to recognize the number of times the pattern change game has been played from the above-mentioned specified timing by looking at the game number image 26q displayed on the image display device 26 without having to look at the external information display device installed on top of the pachinko game machine 1.

In time-saving play states A, B, and the special chance play state, the game count image 26q is difficult to see. This is because, in time-saving play states A and B in particular, the remaining number of plays image 26s (see Figure 59) indicating the number of plays available in the time-saving play state is displayed, and if the game count image 26q were also displayed, it would be difficult to understand.

Note that being difficult to see may mean that the game count image 26q is not displayed on any display layer, or that it is displayed on a display layer but that display layer is difficult to see. In the latter case, although it is not visible to the player, the game count image 26q is updated every time a symbol variation game is played.

The "game count counter command" indicates the number of times a symbol change game has been played in normal game mode and time-saving game mode A, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when a special symbol is displayed in a static state on the first special symbol display device 27a or the second special symbol display device 27b.

In this embodiment, when the game is in normal play mode and there are 100 symbol variation games remaining until time-saving play mode B is activated, a play count counter image 26p is displayed on the image display device 26 (see FIG. 54, etc.). In other words, when the received "play count counter command" (counter value) indicates "798," the performance control board 200 performs processing to display the play count counter image 26p (e.g., 100 games remaining). Thereafter, each time a "play count counter command" is received, processing is performed to update the play count counter image 26p (decrementing the display by one).

In other words, the number of games played counter image 26p is not displayed until the number of remaining symbol change games until the time-shortened game state B is activated reaches 100, and is displayed when the number of remaining symbol change games until the time-shortened game state B is activated reaches 100.
This prevents the player from becoming too absorbed in the game if the game number counter image 26p is always displayed.

In this embodiment, the number of plays counter image 26p is displayed when 100 plays remain, but it may be displayed all the time from 898 plays remain, or from 10 plays remain, or it may be displayed every predetermined number of plays (100 plays remain, 50 plays remain, 10 plays remain, etc.).
In the following description, the displays of the game number image 26q, the number of plays counter image 26p, and the remaining number of plays image 26s may be collectively referred to simply as "game number display."

The "starting hole winning designation command" is used to notify the performance control board 200 in advance of the results of the winning determination, and is set in the main RAM 103 and transmitted to the performance control board 200 when a game ball wins the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22.

The "opening designation command for winning games" indicates that a winning game is about to begin, and is set in the main RAM 103 when various winning games begin and transmitted to the performance control board 200.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds in a winning game, and is set in the main RAM 103 when a winning round of play begins, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "winning game ending specification command" indicates the end of a winning game, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when various winning games end.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved normal symbols, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when the value stored in the reserved normal symbol number storage area increases or decreases.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of normal symbol to be displayed in a stopped state on the normal symbol display 27e, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when various normal symbols are determined and the display of the changing normal symbols begins.

The "normal symbol change specification command" indicates the time for the normal symbol to change on the normal symbol display 27e, and is set in the main RAM 103 when the normal symbol change display begins, and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "opening command for normal winning" indicates that a normal winning game is about to begin, and is set in the main RAM 103 when a normal winning game begins and sent to the performance control board 200.

The "normal winning ending specification command" indicates the end of various normal winning games, and is set in the main RAM 103 when a normal winning game ends and is sent to the performance control board 200.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether the game is in a time-saving game state, whether the game is in a high-probability game state, and if the game is in a time-saving game state, whether the game is in time-saving game state A or time-saving game state B. Depending on each game state designation command, it is set in the main RAM 103 when the special symbol starts to change, when the special symbol changes to end (when a winning game starts), and when a winning game ends, and is sent to the performance control board 200. Each game state designation command is also described in detail in the flowchart.

The "power-on command" and "power-restore command" indicate whether or not powering on the pachinko gaming machine 1 involves initializing the main RAM 103. When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a power-on command or power-restore command corresponding to whether or not the main RAM 103 has been initialized and the game status is sent to the performance control board 200.

In this embodiment, when either a "power-on command" or a "power-restoration command" is received, processing is performed to display "0" as the game count image 26q. This prevents the number of symbol-changing games played before transitioning to time-saving game state B from being easily discovered, for example, when a gaming establishment opens.

When a "power restoration command" is received (when main RAM 103 has not been initialized), a transition to time-saving game state B may occur when game count image 26q displays a number earlier (fewer) than the aforementioned "898" times. For example, if the number of times the symbol change game had been played at closing time on the previous day was "100" and main RAM 103 had not been initialized, a transition to time-saving game state B may occur when game count image 26q displays "798" times.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that the machine has entered a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed. When the machine enters a customer waiting state, the command is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200.

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of error. When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the command is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200.

The "error removal command" indicates that an error that occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the main RAM 103 and sent to the performance control board 200 when it is detected that various abnormalities have been resolved.

The "setting value designation command" indicates the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is sent to the performance control board 200 after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, specifically after a power-on designation command or a power-restoration designation command is sent, while the setting change process is being executed, or while the setting confirmation process is being executed.

The "setting value changing command" indicates that the setting change process is being executed, and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the setting change process is being executed (Figure 14).
The "setting value checking command" indicates that the setting check process is being executed, and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the setting check process is being executed (Figure 15).
The "setting value confirmation end command" indicates that the setting confirmation process has ended, and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the setting confirmation process is being executed (Figure 15).

The "limit function release prompt command" is intended to prompt the initialization (clearing) of the main RAM 103, and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the main control board main processing is being executed (Figure 12).
The "limit management counter clear command" indicates that the limit management counter (counted and stored number of out balls, number of safe balls, and number of difference balls) has been initialized (cleared), and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the main control board main processing is being executed (Figure 12).

The "Limit Management Counter (Difference in Number of Balls) Command" indicates the value of the limit management counter (particularly the current difference in number of balls) and is sent to the performance control board 200 while the limit management process is being executed (Figure 26).

The "limit function activation start command" indicates that the limit function has been activated, and is sent to the performance control board 200 during execution of the limit management process (FIG. 26). The limit function will be explained in the limit management process of FIG.
The "fire stop command" is intended to stop the operation of the firing device 305 (e.g., turn off the firing solenoid), and is sent to the dispensing control board 300 while the limit management process is being executed (Figure 26).

Next, we will explain the control processing performed by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100.

(Main control board main processing)
12 is a flowchart showing the main processing (1/2) performed in the main control board 100. This processing is started by the main CPU 101 of the main control board 100 when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and voltage is supplied to each control board from the power supply board 400.

(Step S1)
In step S1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage (power failure state). If the result is that the power is out (power failure state), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed, and if the power is not out (power failure state), the process proceeds to step S2. If the power is out (power failure state), the process can be executed using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 101 prohibits interrupts (main control board timer interrupt processing). As a result, the main CPU 101 executes only this processing until an interrupt is permitted in step S24 (described later). Once the interrupt is prohibited, the processing proceeds to step S3.

Furthermore, after completing the processing of step S2, a signal to stop firing (a firing stop command) may be output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state. This prevents game balls from being fired while the interrupt is prohibited. Then, in the first main control board timer interrupt processing after the interrupt is permitted in step S24 (described below), the firing permission signal may be set to an permitted state.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 101 initializes (clears) the limit management counter. Specifically, the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, and the difference in balls counted and stored in the limit management counter in the main RAM 103 are initialized (cleared) to all "0." Note that the initial values of the number of out balls and the number of safe balls are not limited to "0" and may be any value, and the initial value of the number of safe balls may be greater than the initial value of the number of out balls. For example, the initial value of the number of out balls may be "0," and the initial value of the number of safe balls may be "100,000." This prevents negative values from being calculated in the difference in balls calculation process described below, and prevents program malfunctions. After the limit management counter is initialized (cleared), processing proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 101 transmits a limit management counter clear command to the performance control board 200. As described above, this command indicates that the limit management counters (counted and stored number of out balls, number of safe balls, and number of difference balls) have been initialized (cleared), and by transmitting this command to the performance control board 200, it is notified that the limit management counters (counted and stored number of out balls, number of safe balls, and number of difference balls) have been initialized (cleared) (see FIG. 72). This allows the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to recognize that the limit management counters have been initialized (cleared). Then, after transmitting this command, the process proceeds to step S5.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON (whether it is pressed). That is, it determines whether the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ON (the power SW 400a is ON) with the RAM clear switch 105 pressed. If the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S6. If the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S13.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 101 determines whether the limit function is in operation. Specifically, the main CPU 101 checks the limit function in operation flag that is set to ON in step S113-10 of the limit management process (FIG. 26), and determines that the limit function is in operation if the flag is ON. If the limit function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S7. If the limit function is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 101 performs a state restoration (limit function inactivation) process. Specifically, the limit function activation flag is turned OFF to deactivate the activated limit function. In other words, to cancel the activated limit function, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 must be turned ON (the power SW 400a must be ON) with the RAM clear switch 105 pressed. Then, after the state restoration (limit function inactivation) process is completed, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. For example, if it detects that the setting change key has been inserted into the setting change keyhole 31 and that the setting change key has been rotated 90 degrees, it determines that the setting change key is in the setting change position; if it does not detect this, it determines that the setting change key is not in the setting change position. If the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S9, and if the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S11.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 101 performs the setting value change process shown in Fig. 14. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 14. Then, when the setting value change process ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. The power-on command indicates that the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and power has been turned on. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 200, via the image/sound control unit 200b, causes the image display device 26 to display "Power on" and the speaker 10 to output the audio message "Power on." After transmitting the power-on command, the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S11)
In step S11, if the RAM clear switch 105 is ON and the power SW 400a is ON, the main CPU 101 initializes areas 1 and 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103. This allows, for example, if a time-reduced game state (A or B) is in effect when the gaming parlor closes, the game can be restarted in the normal game state when the gaming parlor opens the following day. In this process, each game number counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (counter value is set to 0). Then, after initializing areas 1 and 2 (excluding the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 101 transmits a power-on command. After transmitting the power-on command, the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S13)
In step S13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the limit function is in operation, as in step S6. If the limit function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S14. If the limit function is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S15.

(Step S14)
In step S14, the main CPU 101 transmits a limit function release prompt command to the performance control board 200. As described above, this command is intended to prompt the initialization (clearing) of the main RAM 103, and transmission of this command to the performance control board 200 notifies the user that the initialization (clearing) of the main RAM 103 is being prompted (see FIG. 72). This makes it easy for the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to understand how to release the limit function. Once this command is transmitted, the process remains as is unless the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (the power SW 400a is turned on) with the RAM clear switch 105 pressed.

(Step S15)
In step S15, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change key is in the setting change position. If the setting change key is in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S16. If the setting change key is not in the setting change position, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S16)
In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs the setting value confirmation process shown in Fig. 15. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 15. Then, when the setting value confirmation process ends, the process proceeds to step S17.

(Step S17)
In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether backed-up data exists. For example, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, a backup process (not shown) is performed, data is retained, a checksum is stored, and a backup flag is turned on. If the backup flag is on, it is determined that backed-up data exists; if the backup flag is not on, it is determined that backed-up data does not exist. As a result, if backed-up data exists, the process proceeds to step S18; if no backed-up data exists, it is determined that this is the first power-on, and the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S18)
In step S18, the main CPU 101 calculates a checksum of the area of the main RAM 103. After calculating the checksum of the area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S19.

(Step S19)
In step S19, the main CPU 101 determines whether the checksum of the area in the main RAM 103 is normal. For example, it determines whether the checksum value stored in a backup process (not shown) matches the checksum value calculated in step S18, and if they match, it determines that the checksum is normal. If they do not match, it determines that the checksum is abnormal. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S21, and if the checksum is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S20.

(Step S20)
In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs a game stop process (error setting). Specifically, it transmits an error command to the performance control board 200 to notify an error using the light emitting device 9, speaker 10, image display device 26, etc., and performs a process that makes it impossible to cancel the error unless the setting value change process of Figure 14 is performed. Then, it remains in this process unless the setting value change process of Figure 14 is performed.

(Step S21)
In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs recovery processing. That is, the main CPU 101 restores the normal state to the state before the power outage. Once the normal state before the power outage is restored, the process proceeds to step S22.

(Step S22)
In step S22, the main CPU 101 transmits a power restoration command. The power restoration command indicates that the RAM clear switch 105 is OFF and power has been restored. Upon receiving this command, the performance control board 200, via the image/sound control unit 200b, causes the image display device 26 to display "Power restoration in progress" and the speaker 10 to output a sound saying "Power restoration in progress." After transmitting the power restoration command, the process proceeds to step S23.

(Step S23)
In step S23, the main CPU 101 sets the CTC. That is, it sets the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) which has functions such as generating pulse output at a fixed cycle and measuring time, and sets the time constant register of the CTC so that the main control board timer interrupt process (described later) is performed periodically every 4 ms. Then, after setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S24.

(Step S24)
In step S24, the main CPU 101 permits the interrupt. After permitting the interrupt, the main CPU 101 waits, and thereafter, a main control board timer interrupt process (described later) is performed every 4 ms.

(Regarding setting value change processing)
14 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (a subroutine of step S9 of the main control board main processing) performed on the main control board 100. The state in which the processing in FIG. 14 is being performed corresponds to the "setting change state" described above.

(Step S9-1)
In step S9-1, the main CPU 101 initializes the areas of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area). In this process, each game number counter shown in Fig. 9 is also cleared (counter value is set to 0). Then, after initializing the areas of the main RAM 103 (excluding the setting value storage area), the process proceeds to step S9-2.

In step S9-1, each play count counter shown in FIG. 9 is also cleared (counter value is set to 0), but each play count counter may not be cleared. This can meet the needs of those who want to change the setting value but do not want to clear each play count counter.

(Step S9-2)
In step S9-2, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value changing command. The setting value changing command is a command indicating that a setting value change process is being performed, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it causes, for example, the image display device 26 to display "setting changing" via the image/sound control unit 200b, and causes the speaker 10 to output a sound saying "setting changing." Then, after transmitting the setting value changing command, the process proceeds to step S9-3.

(Step S9-3)
In step S9-3, the main CPU 101 reads out the current setting value and displays it on the display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1," then "1" is displayed on the display 104. After reading out the current setting value and displaying it on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S9-4.

(Step S9-4)
In step S9-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RAM clear switch 105 is ON. If the RAM clear switch 105 is ON, the process proceeds to step S9-5. If the RAM clear switch 105 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S9-7.

(Step S9-5)
In step S9-5, the main CPU 101 performs a process of changing the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "2." When the set value is "2" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "3." When the set value is "3" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "4." When the set value is "4" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "5." When the set value is "5" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "6." When the set value is "6" and the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON, the set value is changed to "1." Then, after the set value is changed, the process proceeds to step S9-6.

(Step S9-6)
In step S9-6, the main CPU 101 displays the changed setting value on the display 104 (e.g., the rightmost segment). For example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "1" is displayed, the setting value "2" is displayed; if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting value "3" is displayed; if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "3" is displayed, the setting value "4" is displayed; if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "4" is displayed, the setting value "5" is displayed; if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "5" is displayed, the setting value "6" is displayed; and if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "6" is displayed, the setting value "1" is displayed. Then, after the changed setting value is displayed on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S9-7.

(Step S9-7)
In step S9-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is in a position rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction) from a position rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontal direction). If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S9-8. If a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S9-4.

(Step S9-8)
In step S9-8, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103. That is, when the desired setting value is displayed on the display 104, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is confirmed by rotating the setting change key 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertical direction). As a result, subsequent games will be played based on the stored setting value. Then, once the setting value has been stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S9-9.

(Step S9-9)
In step S9-9, the main CPU 101 hides the display 104. That is, it hides the setting value that was displayed on the display 104 in step S9-6. Then, after the display 104 is hidden, the process proceeds to step S9-10.

(Step S9-10)
In step S9-10, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value designation command. The setting value designation command is a command that indicates setting value information, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it stores the setting value information in the sub-RAM 203 and references the setting value information stored in the sub-RAM 203 when executing the setting value suggestion performance described below. Furthermore, when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it terminates the notification such as "Settings are being changed" described above. Then, after transmitting the setting value designation command, processing proceeds to step S10 of the main control board main processing.

As mentioned above, the setting value change process may be performed even when there is one setting value. In step S9-5, for example, the setting value may be changed from "1" to "1". In step S9-6, for example, if the RAM clear switch 105 is turned ON while the setting value "1" is displayed, the setting value "1" may be displayed. Also, in step S9-8, the setting value "1" is already stored, but it may be updated and stored.

(Regarding setting value confirmation processing)
15 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation process (a subroutine of step S16 of the main control board main process) performed on the main control board 100. The state in which the process of FIG. 15 is being performed corresponds to the "setting confirmation state" described above.

(Step S16-1)
In step S16-1, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value checking command. The setting value checking command indicates that the setting value checking process is being performed. When the performance control board 200 receives this command, it causes, for example, the image display device 26 to display "Settings checking" via the image/sound control unit 200b, and causes the speaker 10 to output a sound saying "Settings checking." Then, after transmitting the setting value checking command, the process proceeds to step S16-2.

(Step S16-2)
In step S16-2, the main CPU 101 reads out the current setting value and displays it on the display 104. For example, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the main RAM 103 is "1," then "1" is displayed on the display 104. After reading out the current setting value and displaying it on the display 104, the process proceeds to step S16-3.

(Step S16-3)
In step S16-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether an end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting change key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise (horizontally) to a position where it has been rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (vertically). If an end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S16-4. If an end operation has not been performed, the process loops until an end operation is performed.

(Step S16-4)
In step S16-4, the main CPU 101 hides the display 104. That is, it hides the setting value that was displayed on the display 104 in step S16-2. Then, after the display 104 is hidden, the process proceeds to step S16-5.

(Step S16-5)
In step S16-5, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting value confirmation end command. The setting value confirmation end command is a command indicating that the setting value confirmation process has ended, and when the performance control board 200 receives this command, it terminates the notification such as "Settings are being confirmed" described above. Then, after transmitting the setting value confirmation end command, the process proceeds to step S17 of the main control board main process.

As mentioned above, the setting value confirmation process may be performed even when a single setting value is provided. Furthermore, if the device does not have any setting values and is designated as a non-setting device, the processes in Figures 14 and 15 may be omitted.

(Main control board timer interrupt processing)
16 is a flowchart showing main control board timer interrupt processing performed in the main control board 100. This processing is executed by periodically (for example, every 4 ms) interrupting the main control board main processing described above.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 101 saves information stored in a register. After saving the information stored in the register, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs a time management process to update a timer used in the game (for example, the opening time of the big prize opening 24, etc.). After updating the timer used in the game, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 101 updates the initial random numbers such as the random number values for determining a win, the random number values for determining a special symbol, the random number values for determining a variation pattern, etc. Then, when the various random number update processes are completed, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 101 detects input from each switch shown in Fig. 4. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 17. Then, when an input from each switch is detected, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the special symbols. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 20. Then, when the processing related to the special symbols is completed, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the normal symbol. For example, when the gaming ball passes through the gate member 20, the main CPU 101 performs "normal symbol winning determination processing" to determine the normal symbol and the normal symbol variation time. Then, when the processing related to the normal symbol is completed, the processing proceeds to step S107.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to the payout of game balls. For example, if the input SW detection processing in step S104 detects the entry of a game ball, the main CPU 101 sets a payout command signal in a payout command transmission area to send a payout command signal to the payout control board 300 to pay out the corresponding prize ball, and also receives a payout completion signal from the payout control board 300. Then, when the processing related to the payout of game balls is completed, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs an abnormality determination process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 25. After completing the abnormality determination process, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting various commands to the performance control board 200. For example, in this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether a command has been set in a command transmission area provided on the main control board 100, and if a command has been set, transmits the set command to the performance control board 200 and the payout control board 300. Then, when the command transmission process is completed, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, if the pattern change game is based on a gaming ball entering the first start hole 21, the main CPU 101 performs display control (variation display and confirmation display) of the special pattern on the first special pattern display device 27a, and if the pattern change game is based on a gaming ball entering the second start hole 22, the main CPU 101 performs display control (variation display and confirmation display) of the special pattern on the second special pattern display device 27b. In addition, based on the fact that a gaming ball has entered each start hole and the fact that the pattern change game at each start hole has ended, the main CPU 101 also performs display control of the first special pattern reserved display device 27c and the second special pattern reserved display device 27d. Then, when the display control of the special pattern has ended, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 101 controls the display of the normal symbol (variable display and fixed display) on the normal symbol display 27e. Furthermore, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the gate member 20 and the normal symbol variable game has ended, the main CPU 101 also controls the display of the normal symbol reserved display 27f. Then, when the display control of the normal symbol has ended, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a game performance information management process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 calculates game performance information using the above-mentioned formula "(number of paid-out game balls in normal game mode ÷ number of out balls in normal game mode) × 100" and displays the calculated game performance information on the display 104. Then, when the game performance information management process is completed, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs limit management processing. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 26. Then, when the limit management processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 101 restores the information saved in step S101 to the register, and then ends the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Input SW detection process)
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the input SW detection process performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S104 of the main control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S104-1)
In step S104-1, the main CPU 101 performs a process when the first start hole is detected. This process will be described in detail later using Figure 18. Then, when the process when the first start hole is detected is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-2.

(Step S104-2)
In step S104-2, when the main CPU 101 receives information from the second start hole detection SW 22a that a game ball has been detected, it executes a second start hole detection process. This process will be explained by substituting the second start hole 22 in FIG. 18. Then, when the second start hole detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-3.

(Step S104-3)
In step S104-3, when the main CPU 101 receives information that a gaming ball has been detected from the normal winning opening detection SW 23a, it performs processing to set a payout command signal in a payout command transmission area to have the payout control board 300 pay out eight gaming balls as prize balls. Also, when a gaming ball enters the normal winning opening 23 in a winning game, it sets a normal winning opening ball entry detection signal in the command transmission area to issue a ball entry notification using the speaker 10 and the image display device 26. Then, when the normal winning opening detection processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S104-4.

(Step S104-4)
In step S104-4, when the main CPU 101 receives information indicating that a game ball has been detected from the special prize opening detection SW 24a, it performs processing to set a payout command signal in a payout command transmission area to cause the payout control board 300 to pay out 12 game balls as prize balls. In addition, a special prize opening ball entry detection signal is set in the command transmission area to notify the user of the image display device 26 or the like that a game ball has entered the special prize opening 24. Examples of notification using the image display device 26 or the like include a notification using a display on the image display device 26 or a sound (e.g., a "pirorin♪" sound) from the speaker 10 when the special prize opening detection SW 24a detects more than 10 game balls per round (also known as an over-entry). Then, after the special prize opening detection processing is completed, processing proceeds to step S104-5.
In addition, the notification of an over-winning prize is not limited to a sound from the speaker 10, but may also be made by the light-emitting device 9, by displaying a specific character on the image display device 26, or by vibrating the effect button 14 or effect lever 15 with a vibration device.

(Step S104-5)
In step S104-5, when the main CPU 101 receives information from the gate detection SW 20a that a game ball has been detected, it performs a pass gate detection process. Then, when the pass gate detection process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-6.

(Step S104-6)
In step S104-6, the main CPU 101 performs out-detection processing. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figure 19. Then, when the out-detection processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding processing when the first starting port is detected)
18 is a flowchart (a subroutine of step S104-1 of the input SW detection process) showing the processing performed when the first start port is detected on the main control board 100. Note that the same processing is performed when the second start port is detected, so the first start port can simply be read as the second start port.

(Step S104-1-1)
In step S104-1-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether information indicating that a game ball has entered has been input from the first start hole detection SW 21a. If information indicating that a game ball has entered has been input from the first start hole detection SW 21a, the process proceeds to step S104-1-2. If information indicating that a game ball has entered has not been input from the first start hole detection SW 21a, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Step S104-1-2)
In step S104-1-2, the main CPU 101 sets a prize ball command in the payout command transmission area to have the payout control board 300 pay out three game balls (two balls if the game ball has entered the second start port 22) as prize balls for the game ball entering the first start port 21. After setting the prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S104-1-3.

(Step S104-1-3)
In step S104-1-3, the main CPU 101 counts and stores the expected number of prize balls (safe balls) in the limit management counter. That is, if the ball lands in the first starting hole 21, "3" is counted and stored, and if the ball lands in the second starting hole 22, "2" is counted and stored. Then, once the expected number of prize balls (safe balls) has been counted and stored in the limit management counter, the process proceeds to step S104-1-4.

(Step S104-1-4)
In step S104-1-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the above-mentioned "fourth memory area" has been stored. In other words, it determines whether the number of reserved symbol variation games in the first starting slot 21 is "4". If the "fourth memory area" has been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process, and if the "fourth memory area" has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S104-1-5.

(Step S104-1-5)
In step S104-1-5, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining whether a win has occurred. The random number value acquired in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-9) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), which will be described later. Once the random number value for determining whether a win has occurred is acquired, the process proceeds to step S104-1-6.

Note that the random number value for hit determination may be obtained prior to step S104-1-4. If it is determined in step S104-1-4 that the "fourth storage area" has been filled, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-6)
In step S104-1-6, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol. The random number value acquired in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-9) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), which will be described later. After acquiring the random number value for determining a special symbol, the process proceeds to step S104-1-7.

Note that the random number value for determining the special symbol may be obtained prior to step S104-1-4. If it is determined in step S104-1-4 that the "fourth storage area" has been filled, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-7)
In step S104-1-7, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern. The random number value acquired in this process will be used in the winning determination process (step S104-1-9) and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21), which will be described later. Then, after acquiring the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the process proceeds to step S104-1-8.

The random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern may be obtained prior to step S104-1-4. If it is determined in step S104-1-4 that the "fourth memory area" has been filled, the obtained random number value may be discarded.

(Step S104-1-8)
In step S104-1-8, the main CPU 101 stores the random number values for determining a win, the random number values for determining a special symbol, and the random number values for determining a special symbol variation pattern as determination information in an available memory area. For example, if the "third memory area" is stored and the "fourth memory area" is available, each random number value is stored in the "fourth memory area." Then, once each random number value has been stored in an available memory area, the process proceeds to step S104-1-9.

(Step S104-1-9)
In step S104-1-9, the main CPU 101 performs a winning determination process. This winning determination process is a process for determining whether the random number value acquired in step S104-1-5 is a winning value prior to the special symbol winning determination process in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 21). As a result, for example, if the winning determination random number value stored in the "fourth memory area" in step S104-1-8 is a winning value, a preview effect (the "preview effect" described below) can be executed across multiple variations. Then, when the winning determination process is completed, the process proceeds to step S104-1-10.

(Step S104-1-10)
In step S104-1-10, the main CPU 101 sets the first start port winning designation command in the command transmission area in order to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 200. The first start port winning designation command also includes information on the judgment result of the winning time judgment process in step S104-1-9, and by receiving this command, the performance control board 200 can recognize whether the judgment result of the winning time judgment process is a win or a miss. Then, after setting the first start port winning designation command, the processing proceeds to step S104-1-11.

(Step S104-1-11)
In step S104-1-11, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol storage designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the special symbol storage designation command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the special symbol storage designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S104-2 of the input SW detection process.

(Processing when an out is detected)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the out detection process performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S104-6 of the input SW detection process).

(Step S104-6-1)
In step S104-6-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not information indicating that a game ball has entered the game has been input from the out detection SW 25a. If information indicating that a game ball has entered the game has been input from the out detection SW 25a, the process proceeds to step S104-6-2. If information indicating that a game ball has entered the game has not been input from the out detection SW 25a, the process proceeds to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S104-6-2)
In step S104-6-2, the main CPU 101 counts and stores the number of out balls in the limit management counter. After counting and storing the number of out balls in the limit management counter, the process proceeds to step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding special pattern related processing)
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special symbol-related processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S105-1)
In step S105-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a flag indicating a stopped game is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. For example, when the main CPU 101 starts the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "1" indicating a changing game in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-2-13 in FIG. 21 described later), and when it stops the variation of the special symbol, it sets the value "0" indicating a stopped game in the special symbol state flag storage area (step S105-4-3 in FIG. 22 described later). Note that after setting the value "0" indicating a stopped game, if a win occurs, the value "2" indicating a winning game is set. If the value "0" indicating a stopped game is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2, and if the value "0" indicating a stopped game is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-3.

(Step S105-2)
In step S105-2, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol variation start processing shown in Fig. 21. This processing will be described in detail later using Fig. 21. Then, when the special symbol variation start processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-3)
In step S105-3, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a flag indicating that the special symbol state is changing is stored in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. If the value "1" indicating that the special symbol state is changing is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4, and if the value "1" indicating that the special symbol state is changing is not set, the process proceeds to step S105-5.

(Step S105-4)
In step S105-4, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol variation process shown in Fig. 22. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 22. Then, when the special symbol variation process ends, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5)
In step S105-5, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value "0" indicating a stopped state has not been set and that the value "1" indicating a fluctuating state has not been set, it determines that the value "2" indicating a winning game has been set and performs the winning game processing shown in Figure 24. This processing will be described in detail later using Figure 24. Then, when the winning game processing is completed, the processing proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the processing at the start of special symbol fluctuations)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of special symbol variation carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-2 of the special symbol-related process).

(Step S105-2-1)
In step S105-2-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a reserved item in the reserved memory area of the symbol variation game corresponding to the second start slot 22 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a reserved item corresponding to the second start slot 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-2, and if there is no reserved item corresponding to the second start slot 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-4.

(Step S105-2-2)
In step S105-2-2, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reserved balls in the second start port 22. The subtraction corresponds to sliding the judgment information (random number values) in the "variable memory area" to the "fourth memory area" and then emptying the memory area of "1". Accordingly, the display of the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d also changes to a display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls (from "flashing" to "on" or from "on" to "off"). Then, after subtracting "1" from the number of reserved balls in the second start port 22, the process proceeds to step S105-2-3.

(Step S105-2-3)
In step S105-2-3, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol storage designation command (second special symbol storage designation command) in the command transmission area to subtract the number of reserved symbols managed by the performance control board 200. Then, when the special symbol storage designation command (second special symbol storage designation command) is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-4)
In step S105-2-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a hold in the hold memory area corresponding to the first start port 21 provided in the main RAM 103. If there is a hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-5, and if there is no hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-7.

(Step S105-2-5)
In step S105-2-5, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the number of reserved balls in the first start port 21. The subtraction corresponds to sliding the judgment information (random number values) in the "variable memory area" to the "fourth memory area" and then emptying the memory area of "1". Accordingly, the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c also changes to a display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls (from "flashing" to "on" or from "on" to "off"). Then, after subtracting "1" from the number of reserved balls in the first start port 21, the process proceeds to step S105-2-6.

(Step S105-2-6)
In step S105-2-6, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol storage designation command (first special symbol storage designation command) in the command transmission area to subtract the number of reserved symbols managed by the performance control board 200. Then, after setting the special symbol storage designation command (first special symbol storage designation command), the process proceeds to step S105-2-8.

(Step S105-2-7)
In step S105-2-7, if there is neither a hold corresponding to the second start port 22 nor a hold corresponding to the first start port 21, the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting state designation command in the command transmission area to display a "Waiting for Customers" screen on the image display device 26. Then, after setting the customer waiting state designation command, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

The "Waiting for Customers" screen displays, for example, the sub-symbols confirmed and displayed in the most recently completed symbol-changing game, the background image displayed in the most recently completed symbol-changing game, the variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (which may also include the reserved ball image display area for the second start port), and additional images (for example, a level gauge image or an image resembling a cross key button) indicating that the volume or light intensity can be adjusted. After a predetermined time has elapsed in the "Waiting for Customers" mode, a "demo performance" is executed. In the "demo performance," the sub-patterns and background image displayed in the "Waiting for customers" mode, as well as the variable icon display area 26o, the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g to the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j (which may also include the reserved ball image display area for the second start port) are not displayed, and instead, for example, the entire display area is used to display the model name, manufacturer name, and warning information to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game (see Figure 73). Then, when a predetermined time has passed in the "demo performance," the mode switches to "Waiting for customers" again.

It is also possible not to send the customer waiting state designation command. In this case, the performance control board 200 measures the time since the previous symbol change game ended, and if a predetermined time is measured without receiving a new start command (such as a special symbol change pattern designation command), the "Waiting for Customers" screen is displayed. In this way, the customer waiting state designation command is unnecessary, which reduces the number of commands and simplifies control.

(Step S105-2-8)
In step S105-2-8, if the main CPU 101 reaches this processing after performing step S105-2-2, it uses the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the second start hole detection processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 reaches this processing after performing step S105-2-5, it uses the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first start hole detection processing to determine whether the judgment information (random number value) is a winning judgment information (random number value). Furthermore, the main CPU 101 determines a special symbol based on the result of the judgment. For example, if it determines that the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first start hole detection processing is a winning, it determines one of special symbols A to C, and if it determines that the judgment information (random number value) acquired and stored in the first start hole detection processing is a losing, it determines special symbol D. Then, when the special symbol winning judgment processing is completed, it proceeds to step S105-2-9.

(Step S105-2-9)
In step S105-2-9, the main CPU 101 sets the effect symbol designation command in the command transmission area in order to send the effect symbol designation command to the effect control board 200. For example, if the special symbol D is determined based on the determination result of step S105-2-8, the main CPU 101 sets the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol D. Then, once the effect symbol designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-10.

(Step S105-2-10)
In step S105-2-10, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbols in the symbol variation game (using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 8). Then, after determining the variation pattern of the special symbols, the process proceeds to step S105-2-11.

(Step S105-2-11)
In step S105-2-11, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol variation pattern designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a command indicating the special symbol variation pattern determined in step S105-2-10 to the performance control board 200. For example, if "variation pattern 9" is determined in step S105-2-10, a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating "variation pattern 9" is set. Then, once the special symbol variation pattern designation command is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-12.

(Step S105-2-12)
In step S105-2-12, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in step S105-2-10 in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, if "fluctuation pattern 9" is determined, the fluctuation time "15S" is set. Then, after the fluctuation time is set, the process proceeds to step S105-2-13.

(Step S105-2-13)
In step S105-2-13, the main CPU 101 sets the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is changing in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the player to recognize that the special symbol is changing. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 starts subtracting the change time set in step S105-2-12. Then, when the value "1" indicating that the special symbol is changing is set in the special symbol status flag storage area, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

In the explanation of Figure 21 above, if there is judgment information for the second starting hole 22 in step S105-2-1, the special pattern hit judgment process is executed in priority to the first starting hole 21. However, the special pattern hit judgment process may also be executed in the order in which the balls enter the first starting hole 21 and the second starting hole 22.

(Regarding processing during special pattern changes)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variable processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-4 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-4-1)
In step S105-4-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set variation time has elapsed in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. For example, if "variation pattern 9" is determined and "15S" is set, it determines whether "15S" has elapsed. If the variation time for the special symbol has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-2, and if the variation time for the special symbol has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-2)
In step S105-4-2, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol determination command in the command transmission area in order to transmit a special symbol determination command for stopping the sub-symbols being variably displayed on the image display device 26 to the performance control board 200. Then, after setting the special symbol determination command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-3.

(Step S105-4-3)
In step S105-4-3, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the special symbol is stopped in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the main CPU 101 to recognize that the special symbol is stopped. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the special symbol is stopped is set in the special symbol status flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-4.

(Step S105-4-4)
In step S105-4-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the determination in step S105-2-8 in Fig. 21 is a win or not. If it is a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-5, and if it is not a win, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11.

(Step S105-4-5)
In step S105-4-5, the main CPU 101 sets the value "2" indicating a winning game in the special symbol state flag storage area of the main RAM 103. This allows the main CPU 101 to recognize that a winning game has occurred. Then, after setting the value "2" indicating a winning game in the special symbol state flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S105-4-6.

(Step S105-4-6)
In step S105-4-6, the main CPU 101 clears the game state. For example, if the current game state is the normal game state, it remains the normal game state; if the current game state is the time-saving game state (A, B), it remains the normal game state; and if the current game state is the probability variable game state, it remains the normal game state. This prevents the player from suffering losses due to the game balls only entering the second start slot 22 during the winning game and not entering the big prize slot 24. After the game state is cleared, processing proceeds to step S105-4-7.

(Step S105-4-7)
In step S105-4-7, the main CPU 101 clears each game number counter. That is, when a winning game is won, each game number counter is cleared (counter value is set to 0) before the winning game starts. Then, after each game number counter is cleared, the process proceeds to step S105-4-8.

(Step S105-4-8)
In step S105-4-8, the main CPU 101 transitions to a winning opening that notifies the user that a winning game has started. For example, the winning status storage area of the main RAM 103 stores the status of the winning game, and if it is a winning opening, "0" is set, if the big prize opening 24 is open, "1" is set, if it is an interval between rounds, "2" is set, and if it is an ending, "3" is set. Then, after transitioning to the winning opening, the process transitions to step S105-4-9.

(Step S105-4-9)
In step S105-4-9, the main CPU 101 sets a winning opening command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the winning opening command for executing the effect corresponding to the opening of the winning game to the effect control board 200. Then, after setting the winning opening command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-10.

(Step S105-4-10)
In step S105-4-10, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the opening of the winning game (for example, "10S") in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Then, after setting the time corresponding to the winning opening, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11)
In step S105-4-11, the main CPU 101 performs the game state specific processing shown in Fig. 23. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 23. Then, when the game state specific processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Processing by game state)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the processing for each game state performed by the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-4-11 of the processing during special symbol variation).

(Step S105-4-11-1)
In step S105-4-11-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is time-shortened gaming state A. Specifically, it determines whether "1" indicating time-shortened gaming state A is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is time-shortened gaming state A, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-2, and if the current gaming state is not time-shortened gaming state A, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-8.

(Step S105-4-11-2)
In step S105-4-11-2, the main CPU 101 updates (increments) the time-shortened game state B activation counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the time-shortened game state B activation counter is incremented by "1." Since the time-shortened game state B activation counter does not become "898" in the time-shortened game state A, when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-3, where the time-shortened game state number counter is updated (decremented).
The update can be performed in either a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21 or a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22.

(Step S105-4-11-3)
In step S105-4-11-3, the main CPU 101 updates (decrements) the time-shortened game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the main CPU 101 decrements the time-shortened game state game number counter by "-1." Then, after updating (decrementing) the time-shortened game state game number counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-4.

(Step S105-4-11-4)
In step S105-4-11-4, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. After setting the game number counter command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-5.

(Step S105-4-11-5)
In step S105-4-11-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the counter value after the subtraction, which was updated (decremented) in step S105-4-11-3, is 0. If the counter value after the subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-6, and if the counter value after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-6)
In step S105-4-11-6, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, once the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-7.

(Step S105-4-11-7)
In step S105-4-11-7, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (normal) in the command transmission area to transmit the game state designation command (normal) indicating the normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) indicating the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-8)
In step S105-4-11-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, it determines whether "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-9. If the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-17.

(Step S105-4-11-9)
In step S105-4-11-9, the main CPU 101 updates (increments) the counter for activating the time-shortened gaming state B provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the counter for activating the time-shortened gaming state B is incremented by "+1." After updating (incrementing) the counter for activating the time-shortened gaming state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-10.
The update can be performed in either a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 21 or a pattern change game based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 22.

(Step S105-4-11-10)
In step S105-4-11-10, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. After setting the game number counter command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-11.

(Step S105-4-11-11)
In step S105-4-11-11, the main CPU 101 sets a command for updating the display of the number of games played. After setting the command for updating the display of the number of games played, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-12.

(Step S105-4-11-12)
In step S105-4-11-12, the main CPU 101 determines whether the counter value after updating (adding) the counter for activating the time-shortened gaming state B in step S105-4-11-9 is "898." If the updated counter value is "898," the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-13, and if the updated counter value is not "898," the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-13)
In step S105-4-11-13, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the time-shortened gaming state B. Specifically, "3", which indicates the time-shortened gaming state, is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, once the gaming state is set to the time-shortened gaming state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-14.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the play count counter for activating time-saving play state B reaches "898" in the normal play state, the game transitions from the normal play state to time-saving play state B. The play count counter for activating time-saving play state B is cleared, for example, in step S105-4-7 of FIG. 22. Therefore, if the symbol change game is played "898" times in succession in time-saving play state A and the normal play state without winning a winning game (a disadvantageous situation for the player), the game transitions to time-saving play state B as a rescue measure. This serves as a guideline for "898" times, reducing the number of players who continue playing without limit.

Note that the transition to time-saving gaming state B through this processing may hereafter be referred to as "trigger 2" or "the time-saving gaming state activated (transitioned to) by trigger 2."

Furthermore, when multiple setting values are set, the value of the play count counter for activating time-shortened play state B, which will result in a transition to time-shortened play state B, may be the same for all setting values. For example, whether the setting value is 1 or 6, the value of the play count counter for activating time-shortened play state B, which will result in a transition to time-shortened play state B, may be "898." This prevents players from continuing to play blindly without knowing which setting value is set, and makes it possible to clearly indicate a guideline, such as "898" times, regardless of the setting value.

On the other hand, when multiple setting values are provided, the value of the play count counter for activating time-shortened play state B, which will transition to time-shortened play state B, may be different for each setting value. For example, it may be set to "898" when the setting value is 1, and "750" when the setting value is 6. This makes it possible to determine the setting value from the number of plays that transition to time-shortened play state B, and by drawing attention to the number of plays required to transition to time-shortened play state B, it leads to increased interest in the game.

(Step S105-4-11-14)
In step S105-4-11-14, the main CPU 101 sets "1212" to the time-shortened game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103. That is, if the symbol variation game is played "898" times in succession without winning a winning game in the time-shortened game state A and the normal game state (a situation unfavorable to the player), the time-shortened game state B is granted "1212" times as a rescue. Then, after setting "1212" to the time-shortened game state play count counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-15.

(Step S105-4-11-15)
In step S105-4-11-15, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (time reduction B) in the command transmission area to transmit the game state designation command (time reduction B) indicating that the game is in time-shortened game state B to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (time reduction B) indicating that the game is in time-shortened game state B is set, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-16.

(Step S105-4-11-16)
In step S105-4-11-16, the main CPU 101 clears (sets the counter value to 0) the number of games counter for activating the time-shortened game state B in the main RAM 103. Then, after clearing (setting the counter value to 0) the number of games counter for activating the time-shortened game state B, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-17)
In step S105-4-11-17, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is time-shortened gaming state B. Specifically, it determines whether "3", which indicates time-shortened gaming state B, is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. If the current gaming state is time-shortened gaming state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-18, and if the current gaming state is not time-shortened gaming state B, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-23.

(Step S105-4-11-18)
In step S105-4-11-18, the main CPU 101 updates (decrements) the time-shortened game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the main CPU 101 decrements the time-shortened game state game number counter by "-1." Then, after updating (decrementing) the time-shortened game state game number counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-19.

(Step S105-4-11-19)
In step S105-4-11-19, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. After setting the game number counter command, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-20.

(Step S105-4-11-20)
In step S105-4-11-20, the main CPU 101 determines whether the counter value after the subtraction, which was updated (decremented) in step S105-4-11-18, is 0. If the counter value after the subtraction is 0, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-21, and if the counter value after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-21)
In step S105-4-11-21, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, "0", which indicates the normal gaming state, is stored in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, once the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-22.

(Step S105-4-11-22)
In step S105-4-11-22, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (normal) in the command transmission area to transmit the game state designation command (normal) indicating the normal game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (normal) indicating the normal game state is set, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-4-11-23)
In step S105-4-11-23, the main CPU 101 updates (increments) the probability variable game state game number counter provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, the main CPU 101 increments the probability variable game state game number counter by "+1." Then, after updating (incrementing) the probability variable game state game number counter, the process proceeds to step S105-4-11-24.
When the counter for the number of games in the special game state is updated (incremented) and reaches 10,000, the same processing as steps S105-4-11-6 and S105-4-11-7 is carried out, but this is omitted from this flowchart.

(Step S105-4-11-24)
In step S105-4-11-24, the main CPU 101 sets a game number counter command. After setting the game number counter command, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding winning game processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the winning game processing carried out in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S105-5 of the special symbol related processing).

(Step S105-5-1)
In step S105-5-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a winning opening is in progress. That is, it determines whether "0", which indicates a winning opening, is set in the winning status storage area of the main RAM 103. When the large prize opening is opened in step S105-5-3, which will be described later, the value in the winning status storage area changes from "0" to "1". If a winning opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-5-2, and if a winning opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S105-5-4.

(Step S105-5-2)
In step S105-5-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time corresponding to the winning opening (for example, "10S") has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the winning opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-3. If the time corresponding to the winning opening has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-3)
In step S105-5-3, the main CPU 101 drives the special prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the special prize opening 24. In addition, the time management counter in the main RAM 103 is set to an opening time of 29.5 seconds. This marks the start of the first round of the winning game. In this process, the value in the winning status storage area is changed from "0" to "1." Then, once the special prize opening 24 has been opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-4)
In step S105-5-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether the large prize opening is currently open. It determines whether "1", which indicates that the large prize opening is currently open, is set in the win status storage area of the main RAM 103. If the large prize opening is currently open, the process proceeds to step S105-5-5. If the large prize opening is not currently open, the process proceeds to step S105-5-7.

(Step S105-5-5)
In step S105-5-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether either of the following conditions for closing the large prize opening has been met: that 29.5 seconds have passed with the large prize opening 24 open without the large prize opening detection SW 24a detecting 10 balls entering, or that the large prize opening detection SW 24a has detected 10 balls entering. If the large prize opening closing condition has been met, processing proceeds to step S105-5-6; if the large prize opening closing condition has not been met, processing proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S105-5-6)
In step S105-5-6, the main CPU 101 transitions to the inter-round interval, which is the time between when the large prize opening 24 closes and when it next opens. In this process, the value of the win status storage area is changed from "1" to "2." Then, after transitioning to the inter-round interval, the process transitions to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-7)
In step S105-5-7, the main CPU 101 determines whether an inter-round interval is occurring. That is, it determines whether "2," which indicates an inter-round interval, is set in the hit status storage area of the main RAM 103. If an inter-round interval is occurring, the process proceeds to step S105-5-8. If an inter-round interval is not occurring, the process proceeds to step S105-5-13.

(Step S105-5-8)
In step S105-5-8, the main CPU 101 determines whether the final round has ended. For example, in step S105-5-11 (described later), if the number of remaining rounds is "0" after updating (incrementing or decrementing) the number of rounds, the main CPU 101 determines that the final round has ended in this process. If the final round has ended, the process proceeds to step S105-5-9. If the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to step S105-5-11.

(Step S105-5-9)
In step S105-5-9, the main CPU 101 transitions to an ending that notifies the user that the winning game has ended. In this process, the value of the winning status storage area is changed from "2" to "3." In addition, a time corresponding to the ending of the winning game (for example, 10 seconds) is set in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. Then, after transitioning to the ending, the process transitions to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-10)
In step S105-5-10, the main CPU 101 sets an ending command in the command transmission area to transmit an ending command for executing a presentation corresponding to the ending of the winning game to the presentation control board 200. Then, after setting the ending command, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-11)
In step S105-5-11, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the round number counter in the main RAM 103. The updating method may be incrementing or decrementing. For example, if a 5-round win is awarded, the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may be set to "5" and decremented by one each time a round is completed, or the round number counter in the main RAM 103 may not be set to "5" but may be incremented by one each time a round is completed. After updating the number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S105-5-12.

(Step S105-5-12)
In step S105-5-12, the main CPU 101 drives the special prize opening opening solenoid 24b to open the special prize opening 24. The main CPU 101 also sets the opening time to 29.5 seconds in the time management counter of the main RAM 103. This starts the second and subsequent rounds of the winning game. In this process, the value of the winning status storage area is changed from "0" to "1." Once the special prize opening 24 is opened, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-13)
In step S105-5-13, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time (e.g., 10 seconds) corresponding to the ending set in step S105-5-9 has elapsed. If the time corresponding to the ending has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S105-5-14. If the time corresponding to the ending has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-14)
In step S105-5-14, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol is any of "special symbol A,""special symbol B," or "special symbol E." In other words, it determines whether the special symbol determined based on the win is any of "special symbol A,""special symbol B," or "special symbol E." If the special symbol is any of "special symbol A,""special symbol B," or "special symbol E," the process proceeds to step S105-5-15, and if the special symbol is not any of "special symbol A,""special symbol B," or "special symbol E," the process proceeds to step S105-5-18.

(Step S105-5-15)
In step S105-5-15, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to the probability variable gaming state. Therefore, in this process, "2" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after "2" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-16.

(Step S105-5-16)
In step S105-5-16, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (probability variable) in the command transmission area to transmit the game state designation command (probability variable) indicating that the game state is in a probability variable game state to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command indicating that the game state is in a probability variable game state is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-17.

(Step S105-5-17)
In step S105-5-17, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped is set in the special symbol status flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S105-5-18)
In step S105-5-18, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state to time-shortened gaming state A. Therefore, in this process, "1" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, after "1" is set in the gaming state storage area of the main RAM 103, the process proceeds to step S105-5-19.

Note that below, the transition to time-saving gaming state A through this processing may be referred to as "trigger 1" or "the time-saving gaming state activated (transitioned to) by trigger 1."

(Step S105-5-19)
In step S105-5-19, the main CPU 101 sets the time-shortened game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100." This means that 100 times of the time-shortened game state A will start from the next variation. Then, after setting the time-shortened game state play count counter provided in the main RAM 103 to "100," the process proceeds to step S105-5-20.

Note that for both "Trigger 1" and "Trigger 2," there may be multiple types of values set in the time-saving play state play count counter. Also, while one of "Trigger 1" and "Trigger 2" may have multiple types, the other may have only one type.

(Step S105-5-20)
In step S105-5-20, the main CPU 101 sets a game state designation command (time reduction A) indicating that the game is in the time-shortened game state A in the command transmission area to transmit the command to the performance control board 200. Then, when the game state designation command (time reduction A) indicating that the game is in the time-shortened game state A is set, the process proceeds to step S105-5-21.

(Step S105-5-21)
In step S105-5-21, the main CPU 101 sets the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped in the special symbol status flag storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, when the value "0" indicating that the reels are stopped is set in the special symbol status flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S106 of the main control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding abnormality determination processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the abnormality determination process performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S108 of the main control board timer interrupt process).

(Step S108-1)
In step S108-1, the main CPU 101 determines whether a magnetic sensor input has been received. Specifically, it determines whether an input has been received from the magnetic sensor 27h. If an input has been received from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-2. If an input has not been received from the magnetic sensor 27h, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-2)
In step S108-2, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds a specified value. If the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-3. If the amount of magnetism detected by the magnetic sensor 27h does not exceed the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-3)
In step S108-3, the main CPU 101 sets a magnetic anomaly error designation command in the command transmission area in order to send the magnetic anomaly error designation command for reporting a magnetic anomaly to the performance control board 200. Then, once the magnetic anomaly error designation command has been set, the process proceeds to step S108-4.

(Step S108-4)
In step S108-4, the main CPU 101 determines whether a radio wave sensor input has been received. Specifically, it determines whether an input has been received from the radio wave sensor 27i. If an input has been received from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S108-5. If an input has not been received from the radio wave sensor 27i, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-5)
In step S108-5, the main CPU 101 determines whether the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds a specified value. If the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i exceeds the specified value, the process proceeds to step S108-6. If the amount of radio waves detected by the radio wave sensor 27i does not exceed the specified value, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Step S108-6)
In step S108-6, the main CPU 101 sets a radio wave abnormality error designation command in the command transmission area in order to transmit the radio wave abnormality error designation command for reporting the radio wave abnormality to the performance control board 200. Then, after setting the radio wave abnormality error designation command, the process proceeds to step S109.

(Regarding limit management processing)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the limit management processing performed in the main control board 100 (a subroutine of step S113 of the main control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S113-1)
In step S113-1, the main CPU 101 acquires the currently stored safe ball value (number of safe balls) by referring to the limit management counter in the main RAM 103. After acquiring the safe ball value (number of safe balls), the process proceeds to step S113-2.

(Step S113-2)
In step S113-2, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of out balls (number of out balls) currently counted and stored by referring to the limit management counter in the main RAM 103. Once the value of out balls (number of out balls) is acquired, the process proceeds to step S113-3.

(Step S113-3)
In step S113-3, the main CPU 101 performs a process to calculate the difference in the number of balls. Specifically, the main CPU 101 calculates the difference in the number of balls by subtracting the value of safe balls (number of safe balls) obtained in step S113-1 by the value of out balls (number of out balls) obtained in step S113-2. Once the difference in the number of balls is calculated, the process proceeds to step S113-4.

(Step S113-4)
In step S113-4, the main CPU 101 updates the limit management counter with the calculated difference in number of balls. As a result, the latest difference in number of balls is managed (stored) in the limit management counter. After the limit management counter has been updated with the calculated difference in number of balls, the process proceeds to step S113-5. In this process, the difference in number of balls managed by the limit management counter is overwritten with the calculated difference in number of balls, but old data (difference in number of balls data) may be stored for a certain period of time.

(Step S113-5)
In step S113-5, the main CPU 101 sends a limit management counter (number of balls difference) command to make the performance control board 200 aware of the value of the limit management counter (particularly the current number of balls difference). By receiving this command, the performance control board 200 can issue a pre-alert before the limit function is activated (see FIG. 76). After sending the limit management counter (number of balls difference) command, the process proceeds to step S113-6.

(Step S113-6)
In step S113-6, the main CPU 101 determines whether the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than 95,000 as a result of updating the limit management counter in step S113-4. If the difference in the number of balls is not equal to or greater than 95,000, the process proceeds to step S114 of the main control board timer interrupt process, and if the difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than 95,000, the process proceeds to step S113-7.

Note that "95000" is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate. For example, "50000" would also be acceptable. The value may also differ depending on the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, as in this embodiment, if the performance is such that there is a 65% chance of transitioning to (or continuing in) the special probability game state, then the value may be "95000," and if the performance is such that there is an 80% chance of transitioning to (or continuing in) the special probability game state, then the value may be "80000." This allows an appropriate value to be set depending on the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Also, the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be allowed to set any value within "95,000." For example, it may be possible to set it in increments of "5,000." This allows each gaming parlor to have its own unique characteristics, even for the same pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Step S113-7)
In step S113-7, the main CPU 101 sends a limit function activation start command to the performance control board 200 to notify the performance control board 200 that the limit function has been activated. By receiving this command, the performance control board 200 can execute the notification that the limit function has been activated (see FIG. 68). After sending this command, the process proceeds to step S113-8.

(Step S113-8)
In step S113-8, the main CPU 101 transmits a firing stop command to the payout control board 300 to stop the operation of the firing device 305 (for example, turn off the firing solenoid). By receiving this command, the payout control board 300 disables the firing of game balls by the firing device 305, even if the handle touch sensor is touched by the player. After transmitting this command, the process proceeds to step S113-9.

(Step S113-9)
In step S113-9, the main CPU 101 lights up all of the symbol display devices 27. Specifically, it lights up all of the LEDs and segments that make up the first special symbol display device 27a, the second special symbol display device 27b, the first special symbol reserved display device 27c, the second special symbol reserved display device 27d, the normal symbol display device 27e, the normal symbol reserved display device 27f, and the round display device 27g. As a result, even if the connector connecting the main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 (the connector required for command transmission) is disconnected or partially inserted, and the limit function activation start command cannot be transmitted to the performance control board 200 (i.e., even if no notification that the limit function has been activated is made), the lighting of all of the symbol display devices 27 on the main control board 100 side can indicate to the player or administrator that some kind of irregular event has occurred. Once all of the symbol display devices 27 are lit, processing proceeds to step S113-10.

Note that the configuration of step S113-9 can be modified as appropriate. For example, instead of lighting all the lights, all the lights can be flashed. This configuration allows for more variation than lighting all the lights, making it easier to recognize that an irregular event has occurred.

Also, instead of using the entire symbol display device 27, only a portion of it may be used. For example, only the first special symbol display device 27a and the second special symbol display device 27b (segments) may be used. When only the segments are used, the segments may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g., "E.") corresponding to the activation of the limit function. This configuration can add a more meaningful message than lighting an LED, making it easier to recognize that an irregular event has occurred.
In this way, a predetermined display mode is configured by all lights on, all flashing, some lights on, some flashing, etc.

(Step S113-10)
In step S113-10, the main CPU 101 performs limit function activation processing (stopping the game). Once this processing is performed, the game will remain in the state where this processing has been completed (will not be playable) unless the processing of step S7 in FIG. 12 is performed.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is equipped with a "limit function." In other words, when the number of safe balls increases due to consecutive winning games and the difference in the number of balls reaches "95,000" or more, the machine forcibly disables the release of game balls and stops the game (making it impossible for the player to play any more).
This prevents the game from becoming too much fun and prevents a player who has acquired many game balls from becoming too absorbed in the game.

The "limit function" is activated during a winning game, when a winning game ends, during a probability variable game state, during a time-limited game state (A, B), and during normal game state. Furthermore, during a probability variable game state, during a time-limited game state (A, B), and during normal game state, this includes when a symbol change game is running and when a symbol change game is not running. However, since it is expected that the limit function will be activated when the number of safe balls increases suddenly, the majority of times it will be activated during a winning game or when a winning game has ended.

Next, we will explain the control processing performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the performance control board 200.

(Regarding control processing performed by the sub-CPU 201)
27 to 33 are stored in the sub-ROM 202, and the sub-CPU 201 reads the control programs from the sub-ROM 202 and performs control processing in accordance with the read control programs. First, the main processing of the performance control board in FIG. 27 will be described.

(Step S200)
In step S200, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a power outage (power failure state). If the result is that the power is out (power failure state), the process of step S200 is repeatedly executed, and if the power is not out (power failure state), the process proceeds to step S201. If the power is out (power failure state), the process can be executed using a backup power source (not shown).

(Step S201)
In step S201, the sub-CPU 201 performs an initial setting process to initialize the values of internal registers, etc. After completing the initial setting process, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the sub-CPU 201 sets the CTC. That is, it sets the CTC (counter timer circuit) which has the function of generating a pulse output at a fixed period and the function of measuring time, and sets the time constant register of the CTC so that the performance control board timer interrupt processing described below is performed periodically every 4 ms. Then, after setting the CTC, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the sub-CPU 201 inhibits the interruption of the performance control board timer interrupt process, which periodically interrupts the performance control board main process. After inhibiting the interruption, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the sub-CPU 201 updates the random numbers for effect. When the update process of the random numbers for effect is completed, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the sub-CPU 201 allows the interruption of the performance control board timer interrupt process, which periodically interrupts the performance control board main process. Then, when the interruption is allowed, the process again proceeds to step S203, and thereafter steps S203 to S205 are looped.

(Regarding the performance control board timer interrupt processing)
28 is a flowchart showing the performance control board timer interrupt processing performed in the performance control board 200. This processing is executed by periodically interrupting the performance control board main processing described above (for example, every 4 ms).

(Step S300)
In step S300, the sub CPU 201 saves the contents of the registers in the stack area. After saving the contents of the registers in the stack area, the process proceeds to step S301.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process of updating a timer managed by the performance control board 200. Then, after updating the timer, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub-CPU 201 performs input processing for the operation device shown in Fig. 29. This processing will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 29. Then, when the input processing for the operation device is completed, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub-CPU 201 performs the main command reception process shown in Figures 30 and 31. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 30 and 31. Then, when the main command reception process ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub-CPU 201 performs a ball difference counter display control process. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 33. Then, when the ball difference counter display control process is completed, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing to transmit a sub-command. A sub-command is a command set in the main command reception processing shown in Figures 30 and 31, which will be described later. In this processing, the sub-command is transmitted to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c that have received the sub-command control the display, sound, light emission, and drive effects corresponding to the sub-command. Then, once the sub-command has been transmitted, processing proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub-CPU 201 restores the contents saved in the stack area in step S300 to the register. Then, after restoring the contents saved in the stack area to the register, the performance control board timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Regarding operation device input processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the operation device input processing performed in the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a cross key detection SW (up or down) input has been made. Note that the cross key detection SW 16a shown in Fig. 4 has switches corresponding to the up, down, left, and right of the cross key button 16, and for example, if the up button of the cross key button 16 is operated, it can be determined that a cross key detection SW (up) input has been made. Then, if a cross key detection SW (up or down) input has been made, the process proceeds to step S302-2, and if a cross key detection SW (up or down) input has not been made, the process proceeds to step S302-5.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether an upward cross key detection SW input has been performed. If an upward cross key detection SW input has been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-3. If an upward cross key detection SW input has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S302-4.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub-CPU 201 sets a light intensity value change (increase) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the light intensity value change (increase) sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. This increases the brightness of the light-emitting device 9. Then, once the light intensity value change (increase) sub-command is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-4)
In step S302-4, the sub-CPU 201 sets a light intensity value change (decrease) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the light intensity value change (decrease) sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. This reduces the brightness of the light-emitting device 9. Then, once the light intensity value change (decrease) sub-command is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-5)
In step S302-5, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a cross key detection switch (left or right) input has been performed. If a cross key detection switch (left or right) input has been performed, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S302-6, and if a cross key detection switch (left or right) input has not been performed, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S302-9.

(Step S302-6)
In step S302-6, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a right-direction cross key detection SW input has been performed. If a right-direction cross key detection SW input has been performed, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S302-7. If a right-direction cross key detection SW input has not been performed, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S302-8.

(Step S302-7)
In step S302-7, the sub-CPU 201 sets a volume change (increase) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the volume change (increase) sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b. This allows the volume of background music (BGM) and sound effects output from the speaker 10 to be increased. Once the volume change (increase) sub-command is set, the process proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S302-8)
In step S302-8, the sub-CPU 201 sets a volume change (decrease) sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to send the volume change (decrease) sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b. This allows the volume of background music, sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 10 to be lowered. Once the volume change (decrease) sub-command is set, processing proceeds to step S303 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

Note that steps S302-1 to S302-8 show the processing when the cross key button 16 is operated to adjust the volume or light intensity, but this is merely an example, and other processing may be performed by operating the cross key button 16. For example, processing to change an item in a menu may be performed by operating the cross key button 16. For example, when the effect button 14 is pressed while waiting for customers or during a demo, the menu is displayed on the image display device 26, and it is possible to check, for example, an introduction to the effects (an introduction to preview effects with a high probability of winning).

(Step S302-9)
In step S302-9, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other operation devices. For example, if there is input from the effect button detection SW 14a, it sends an effect button operation subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. If there is input from the effect lever detection SW 15a, it sends an effect lever operation subcommand to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. Then, after completing processing corresponding to other operation devices, it proceeds to step S303 of the effect control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding main command reception processing)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main command receiving processing 1/2 performed in the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S301 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S301-1)
In step S301-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a power-related information command has been received. Examples of power-related information commands include the power-on command and power-restoration command described above. If a power-related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-2. If a power-related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-4.

(Step S301-2)
In step S301-2, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing when it receives a power-related information command. For example, if it receives a power-on command, it performs processing related to power-on, and if it receives a power-restoration command, it performs processing related to power restoration. In this processing, it sets an initial value to the difference ball number management counter provided in the sub-RAM 203. Then, when this processing is completed, it proceeds to step S301-3.

(Step S301-3)
In step S301-3, the sub-CPU 201 sets a power-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the power-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-4)
In step S301-4, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether an error-related information command has been received. Examples of error-related information commands include the magnetic anomaly error command and the radio wave anomaly error command. If an error-related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-5. If an error-related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-7.

(Step S301-5)
In step S301-5, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing when it receives an error-related information command. For example, if it receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command, it performs processing to notify the user of a magnetic anomaly error, and if it receives a radio wave anomaly error designation command, it performs processing to notify the user of a radio wave anomaly error. After completing this processing, it proceeds to step S301-6.

(Step S301-6)
In step S301-6, the sub-CPU 201 sets the error-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the error-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-7)
In step S301-7, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a limit management counter clear command has been received. If a limit management counter clear command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-8. If a limit management counter clear command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-9.

(Step S301-8)
In step S301-8, the sub-CPU 201 sets a limit management counter clear sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to notify that the limit management counter has been cleared. This results in the notification shown in Figure 72 (b2). After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-9)
In step S301-9, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a limit function release prompt command has been received. If the limit function release prompt command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-10. If the limit function release prompt command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-11.

(Step S301-10)
In step S301-10, the sub-CPU 201 sets a limit function release prompt sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to notify the user to initialize (clear) the main RAM 103. This results in the notification shown in Figure 72 (a2). After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-11)
In step S301-11, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a limit function activation start command has been received. If a limit function activation start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-12. If a limit function activation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-13.

(Step S301-12)
In step S301-12, the sub-CPU 201 sets a limit function activation start sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to notify that the limit function has been activated. This results in the notification shown in Figure 68 (a2) (b2). After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-13)
In step S301-13, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a limit management counter (number of balls difference) command. If it has received a limit management counter (number of balls difference) command, it proceeds to step S301-14, and if it has not received a limit management counter (number of balls difference) command, it proceeds to step S301-15.

(Step S301-14)
In step S301-14, the sub-CPU 201 updates the difference in ball count management counter provided in the sub-RAM 203. In this way, a counter that manages the difference in ball count is also provided in the sub-RAM 203, and by updating it when a limit management counter (difference in ball count) command is received, the difference in ball count can also be grasped on the performance control board 200. Then, by grasping the difference in ball count, a pre-alert (see FIG. 76) can be made before the limit function is activated. Then, when this processing is completed, the processing moves to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S301-15)
In step S301-15, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a start port related information command has been received. Examples of start port related information commands include the first start port winning designation command, the second start port winning designation command, and the special symbol storage designation command. If a start port related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-16. If a start port related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-19.

(Step S301-16)
In step S301-16, the sub-CPU 201 performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, when a first start gate winning designation command or a second start gate winning designation command is received, the sub-CPU 201 refers to the information on the determination result of the winning time determination process included in the command, and determines the display mode of the variable icon or reserved icon (the color of the variable icon or reserved icon described in the "reserved advance reading effect" described later). Then, after completing this process, the process proceeds to step S301-17.

(Step S301-17)
In step S301-17, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process to determine whether to change the starting gate light-emitting device. The light color of the starting gate light-emitting device is linked to the color of the reserved icon determined in step S301-16. For example, if it is determined in step S301-16 that the color of the reserved icon is blue when the ball enters the starting gate, the starting gate light-emitting device 21a will also emit blue light. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S301-18.

(Step S301-18)
In step S301-18, the sub-CPU 201 sets the start-up hole-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the start-up hole-related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-19)
In step S301-19, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a game status related information command has been received. Examples of game status related information commands include a game status designation command (normal), a game status designation command (time-saving A, time-saving B), and a game status designation command (probable variable). If a game status related information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-20. If a game status related information command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-22.

(Step S301-20)
In step S301-20, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing upon receiving a game state related information command. For example, when a game state designation command (normal) is received, processing related to the normal game state is performed, when a game state designation command (time-shortened A, time-shortened B) is received, processing related to the respective time-shortened game state is performed, and when a game state designation command (probability variable) is received, processing related to the probability variable game state is performed. Then, upon completion of this processing, the processing proceeds to step S301-21.

(Step S301-21)
In step S301-21, the sub-CPU 201 sets a game status related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the game status related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

Figure 31 is a flowchart showing main command reception processing 2/2 performed on the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S301 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S301-22)
In step S301-22, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a performance symbol designation command. If it has received a performance symbol designation command, it proceeds to step S301-23. If it has not received a performance symbol designation command, it proceeds to step S301-25.

(Step S301-23)
In step S301-23, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing upon receiving a symbol designation command. For example, if a symbol designation command specifying special symbol A is received, a symbol combination of "777" decorative symbols is determined so that the symbol combination of "777" is displayed as a definitive decorative symbol. Note that if a symbol designation command specifying special symbol A is received, a symbol combination of "444" decorative symbols may be determined so that the symbol combination of "444" decorative symbols is displayed as a definitive decorative symbol. In this case, after a winning game ends, the game may transition to time-limited game state A, so that while the game appears to be in time-limited game state A, the actual game state is a variable probability game state. This configuration may provide an advantage even in the appearance of time-limited game state A, thereby enhancing the game's enjoyment. After completing this processing, the game proceeds to step S301-24.

(Step S301-24)
In step S301-24, the sub-CPU 201 sets the effect symbol sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the effect symbol sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-25)
In step S301-25, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received. If a special symbol variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-26. If a special symbol variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-31.

(Step S301-26)
In step S301-26, the sub-CPU 201 performs a variable effect pattern determination process. Specifically, a variable effect pattern corresponding to the specified special symbol variable pattern is determined from a variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) stored in the sub-ROM 202. The variable effect pattern determination table associates one or more variable effect patterns with one special symbol variable pattern. For example, for "normal variable" (7S) of "variation pattern 2," one corresponding variable effect pattern (7S) is prepared, and for "super reach 1" (40S) of "variation pattern 4," multiple corresponding variable effect patterns (40S) are prepared. When "variation pattern 4" is received, one of the multiple prepared variable effect patterns is determined. Since the multiple prepared variable effect patterns each have different effects, multiple effects can be executed for one variable pattern. After this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-27.

(Step S301-27)
In step S301-27, the sub-CPU 201 performs an icon change effect update process. The icon change effect update process is to update the color of the icon determined in step S301-16 based on a change scenario (not shown). For example, if the change scenario is blue → yellow, the process determines that the icon will change to yellow. In other words, the color of the icon may change every time one variation is played. Then, after the process is completed, the process proceeds to step S301-28.

(Step S301-28)
In step S301-28, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process to update the starting port light-emitting device change effect. This process is performed in conjunction with the color updated in step S301-27. For example, if the color is updated to yellow in step S301-27, the starting port light-emitting device 21a also changes from blue to yellow. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S301-29.

(Step S301-29)
In step S301-29, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process for determining a jackpot advance notice effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 201 determines the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed in the symbol variation game from a jackpot advance notice effect determination table (see FIGS. 35 to 41) stored in the sub-ROM 202. Details of the advance notice effect will be described in FIGS. 35 to 41. Then, after completing this process, the process proceeds to step S301-30.

(Step S301-30)
In step S301-30, the sub-CPU 201 sets a variation pattern-related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the variation pattern sub-command (for example, the information determined in steps S301-26 to S301-29) to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-31)
In step S301-31, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a special symbol determination command has been received. If the special symbol determination command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-32. If the special symbol determination command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-34.

(Step S301-32)
In step S301-32, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process when a special symbol determination command is received. Specifically, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process for determining and displaying the left decorative symbol image 26a, the center decorative symbol image 26b, the right decorative symbol image 26c, and the fourth decorative symbol image 26d. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S301-33.

(Step S301-33)
In step S301-33, the sub-CPU 201 sets the special symbol determination sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the special symbol determination sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-34)
In step S301-34, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a game number counter command has been received. If a game number counter command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-35. If a game number counter command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-37.

(Step S301-35)
In step S301-35, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing upon receiving a game number counter command. Specifically, the sub-CPU 201 references the counter value of the game number counter command, and if the counter value is "798", performs processing to display the game number counter image 26p. If the game number counter image 26p is already displayed, performs processing to update (subtract) the game number counter image 26p. Then, upon completion of this processing, the process proceeds to step S301-36.

(Step S301-36)
In step S301-36, the sub-CPU 201 sets a game counter related sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the game counter related sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-37)
In step S301-37, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a game count display update command has been received. If a game count display update command has been received, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S301-38. If a game count display update command has not been received, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S301-40.

(Step S301-38)
In step S301-38, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing upon receiving a command to update the game count display. Specifically, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing to update (add) the game count image 26q on the display layer where the game count image 26q is displayed. After completing this processing, the sub-CPU 201 proceeds to step S301-39.

(Step S301-39)
In step S301-39, the sub-CPU 201 sets a sub-command related to updating the game count display in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the sub-command related to updating the game count display to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-40)
In step S301-40, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether a round designation command has been received. If a round designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S301-41. If a round designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S301-42.

(Step S301-41)
In step S301-41, the sub-CPU 201 performs a process for determining whether to perform consecutive pending effects. This process will be described in detail later with reference to Fig. 32. After completing the process for determining whether to perform consecutive pending effects, the process proceeds to step S302 of the timer interrupt process for the effect control board.

(Step S301-42)
In step S301-42, the sub-CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. For example, if the sub-CPU 201 receives a setting value change command, a setting value confirmation command, or a setting value confirmation end command, it performs processing corresponding to these received commands. Then, after completing this processing, it proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Regarding the hold consecutive performance determination process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the consecutive pending effects performed by the effect control board 200 (a subroutine of step S301-41 of the main command receiving process 2/2).

(Step S301-41-1)
In step S301-41-1, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a reserved item has been stored. Specifically, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not a reserved item has been stored by referring to a reserved storage area provided in the sub-RAM 203. If a reserved item has been stored, the process proceeds to step S301-41-2. If a reserved item has not been stored, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S301-41-2)
In step S301-41-2, the sub-CPU 201 acquires the difference in the number of balls by referring to the difference in the number of balls management counter in the sub-RAM 203. After acquiring the difference in the number of balls, the process proceeds to step S301-41-3.

(Step S301-41-3)
In step S301-41-3, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the difference in the number of balls (current difference in the number of balls) obtained in step S301-41-2 is equal to or greater than 94,000. If it is equal to or greater than 94,000, the process proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt process, and if it is not equal to or greater than 94,000, the process proceeds to step S301-41-4.

(Step S301-41-4)
In step S301-41-4, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether there is winning information in the current reserved memory. Specifically, it determines whether there is winning information in the current reserved memory by referring to the results of the winning determination included in the received first start port winning designation command and second start port winning designation command. If there is winning information in the current reserved memory, it proceeds to step S301-41-5, and if there is no winning information in the current reserved memory, it proceeds to step S302 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing.

(Step S301-41-5)
In step S301-41-5, the sub-CPU 201 determines a consecutive hold effect. That is, during a winning game in which a round designation command is received, the sub-CPU 201 determines to execute a consecutive hold effect that notifies the player that a winning game will be executed consecutively after the winning game ends. When the consecutive hold effect is determined, the process proceeds to step S301-41-6.

(Step S301-41-6)
In step S301-41-6, the sub-CPU 201 sets the hold continuous effect sub-command in the sub-command transmission area to transmit the hold continuous effect sub-command to the image/sound control unit 200b and the light emission drive control unit 200c. The hold continuous effect will be explained again in Figure 78. Then, after completing this process, the process proceeds to step S302 of the effect control board timer interrupt process.

(Regarding the difference ball number counter display control process)
Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the difference ball counter display control processing performed in the performance control board 200 (a subroutine of step S304 of the performance control board timer interrupt processing).

(Step S304-1)
In step S304-1, the sub-CPU 201 acquires the difference in the number of balls by referring to the difference in the number of balls management counter in the sub-RAM 203. After acquiring the difference in the number of balls, the process proceeds to step S304-2.

(Step S304-2)
In step S304-2, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the difference ball number counter image display flag is on. If the difference ball number counter image display flag is on, the process proceeds to step S304-3. If the difference ball number counter image display flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S304-4.

The difference ball number counter image display flag is a flag that is set when the difference ball number counter image is displayed, and is turned off when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

The difference in ball count counter image is a counter image (difference in ball count counter image rm in Figure 76) that is displayed when the current difference in ball count is determined to be 90,000 or more, as shown in step S304-4, and is an image that notifies the player of the remaining difference in ball count until the limit function is activated. If the difference in ball count counter image display flag is on, the image will continue to be displayed even if the current difference in ball count falls below 90,000. This prevents the difference in ball count counter image from repeatedly displaying and hiding, which can be annoying to the player.

Also, for example, if the current difference in balls reaches "89,999" and is hidden, and a player is replaced at that time, the new player will begin playing without realizing that the limit function is about to be activated. In such a case, even if the new player wins a winning game, the limit function will immediately be activated, forcing them to quit playing. In contrast, if the difference in balls counter image display flag is on and the image continues to be displayed even if the current difference in balls falls below "90,000," a player about to start a new game can simply check the difference in balls counter image to decide whether or not to play, thereby eliminating the above-mentioned problem.

(Step S304-3)
In step S304-3, the sub-CPU 201 sets the difference ball number counter image update display data. This allows the current difference ball number to be displayed. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S305 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S304-4)
In step S304-4, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether the current difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than 90,000. If the current difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than 90,000, the process proceeds to step S304-5, and if the current difference in the number of balls is not equal to or greater than 90,000, the process proceeds to step S305 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

(Step S304-5)
In step S304-5, the sub-CPU 201 sets the difference ball number counter image display data. This allows the display of the current difference ball number to begin. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S304-6.

(Step S304-6)
In step S304-6, the sub-CPU 201 turns on the difference ball counter display completion flag in the sub-RAM 203. After completing this process, the process proceeds to step S305 of the performance control board timer interrupt process.

Next, examples of various effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment are described below.

(Predictive performance)
The pre-reading effect is an effect that is executed based on the result of a pre-determination process (e.g., the winning determination process in FIG. 18 ) performed prior to the special symbol hit determination process in the special symbol change start process when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 21 or the second start opening 22. If the pre-reading effect is not implemented, for example, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 21, determination information (random number value) is acquired and stored, and then the special symbol hit determination process is performed in the special symbol change start process. Therefore, even if the determination information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area," it is not determined whether or not there is a hit until the determination information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area." Therefore, even if "win" determination information (random number value) has been acquired, it is not possible to execute an effect that heightens the expectation of a win before the determination information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area." However, if a predictive display is installed, for example, a "pre-judgment process (judgment process at the time of winning)" can be performed to determine whether the result is a "win" or a "lose," and then continuous displays can be executed across multiple variations (including the variations moved to the variable memory area) until the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area," thereby increasing the anticipation of a "win" from a stage before the judgment information (random number value) is transferred to the "variable memory area."

A specific example of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is a "reserved ball look-ahead effect." The "reserved ball look-ahead effect" primarily uses the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o, the reserved icon displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g through the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j, and the reserved icon displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k through the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n. For example, if judgment information (random number values) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area" and a game ball enters the first start port 21, the judgment information (random number values) is stored in the "fourth memory area" and then a pre-determination process is performed. Then, if it is determined based on the judgment result of the pre-determination process that a reserved ball look-ahead effect should be performed, a pre-determination reserved icon different from the default normal color (white) reserved icon (normal icon) is displayed in the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j. The pre-reading hold icon can be displayed in multiple types and in multiple stages, such as "blue," "yellow," "green," "red," and "rainbow." If the result of the preliminary determination process is a "win," any of "blue," "yellow," "green," "red," or "rainbow" can be displayed. If the result of the preliminary determination process is a "miss," any of "blue," "yellow," "green," or "red" can be displayed. The "rainbow" can be selected only in the case of a "win," and "red" is made easier to select in the case of a "win," while "blue" is made easier to select in the case of a "miss," thereby increasing the likelihood of winning with "red." The order of expectation for a win is as follows: rainbow > red > green > yellow > blue > normal. Hereinafter, this type of effect may be referred to as a "hold change effect."

Another example of the above-mentioned predictive effects is a "win flash effect." The "win flash effect" is an effect in which, when a game ball enters a starting hole, the speaker lamp 10a provided on the lower speaker 10 lights up and continues to light up until the symbol change game related to the ball entering the starting hole starts, or until the symbol change game related to the ball entering the starting hole is executed, or until the symbol change game related to the ball entering the starting hole ends, thereby increasing the likelihood of a win. For example, when determination information (random number values) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the determination information (random number values) is stored in the "fourth memory area," and then a pre-determination process is performed. Then, if it is determined based on the result of the pre-determination process that a win flash effect should be performed, a scenario (a scenario with a predetermined light color) for illuminating the speaker lamp 10a is selected, and the speaker lamp 10a is illuminated based on the selected scenario.
The color of the speaker lamp 10a is, for example, red > green > blue, in descending order of the likelihood of winning, and it is possible to change the color to the color that indicates the likelihood of winning for each symbol change game, just like the reserved pre-reading effect described above. It is also possible to output a winning sound corresponding to each color.

Another specific example of the above-mentioned predictive effects is the "zone effect." The "zone effect" is an effect that primarily uses the image display device 26. For example, if the judgment information (random number value) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area" and a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number value) is stored in the "fourth memory area," and then a pre-determination process is performed. If it is determined based on the judgment result of the pre-determination process that a zone effect should be performed, for example, in the next symbol change game, the image display device 26 displays an effect encouraging entry, such as "Enter the XX zone when special symbols line up!", and then, when the special symbols line up, the player enters the "XX zone." The "XX zone" effect is executed until the judgment information (random number value) stored in the above-mentioned "fourth memory area" is transferred to the "change memory area." During the execution of this "XX zone" effect, the image display device 26 displays a caption such as "In the XX zone." Furthermore, the "zone effect" is likely to be executed if the preliminary determination process determines a "win" and is unlikely to be executed if the preliminary determination process determines a "loss," so if it is executed, there can be great hope that a winning game will be awarded.

Another specific example of the above-mentioned predictive effects is a "continuous chance eye announcement." The "continuous chance eye announcement" is an effect that primarily uses the left decorative pattern image 26a, the center decorative pattern image 26b, and the right decorative pattern image 26c displayed on the image display device 26. For example, when judgment information (random number values) is stored up to the above-mentioned "third memory area," if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the judgment information (random number values) is stored in the "fourth memory area," and then a pre-determination process is performed. Then, if it is determined based on the judgment result of the pre-determination process that a continuous chance eye effect should be performed, for example, a combination of decorative pattern images of the same color is stopped in the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number values) stored in the "first memory area," the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number values) stored in the "second memory area," and the confirmation display of the pattern change game corresponding to the judgment information (random number values) stored in the "third memory area." For example, the decorative pattern image may consist of "333" and "777" in red, "111" and "555" in green, and "222", "444", "666", and "888" in blue. By displaying multiple variations of red-only combinations such as "337" and "773", green-only combinations such as "115" and "551", and blue-only combinations such as "246" and "628", the effect creates anticipation that a win may be awarded in the subsequent pattern variation game. In the case of a win, it is easy to select a combination consisting of only red, and in the case of a loss, it is easy to select a combination consisting of only blue, increasing the expectation of a win when a red-only combination is displayed.

(Pseudo consecutive announcement)
The pseudo consecutive announcement is an effect that mainly uses the left decorative pattern image 26a, the center decorative pattern image 26b, the right decorative pattern image 26c, and the symbols dedicated to the pseudo consecutive announcement (for example, the "pseudo" image gz) displayed on the image display device 26, and by repeatedly displaying the decorative patterns as if they were changing multiple times in a "game of one change," it is an effect that makes it appear as if multiple changes are occurring. For example, as shown in Figure 8, the pseudo consecutive announcement can be performed two or three times, and the more times it is performed, the higher the expectation of winning. As a specific effect, for example, "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a, "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, and a "pseudo consecutive exclusive pattern (for example, "pseudo" image gz)" is temporarily displayed as the middle decorative pattern image 26b, and all decorative pattern images are displayed variably again (at this point, two pseudo consecutive times), and again, "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a, and "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, and a "pseudo consecutive exclusive pattern (for example, " The effect is such that the left decorative pattern image 26a is temporarily displayed as a stopped symbol, and then all decorative pattern images are displayed in a variable manner again (at this point, three pseudo consecutive turns). For example, if, in the second temporary stop display, a "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a and a "5" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, this will result in two pseudo consecutive turns, and if, in the second temporary stop display, a "5" is temporarily displayed as the left decorative pattern image 26a and a "6" is temporarily displayed as the right decorative pattern image 26c, this will result in three pseudo consecutive turns. In addition, once a reach has been reached, a so-called "post-reach pseudo-consecutive" effect can be implemented in which a "pseudo-consecutive exclusive symbol (e.g., "pseudo" image gz)" is temporarily displayed as the middle decorative symbol image 26b, or, for example, when the fluctuation starts after the first temporary stop display, a notice (symbol stop notice) is given that a "pseudo-consecutive exclusive symbol (e.g., "pseudo" image gz)" will be temporarily displayed in the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and at that point three or more pseudo-consecutive hits are confirmed.

(Regarding the relationship between the winning sound, change sound, and start-up light-emitting device (color) for each icon)
34 shows the relationship between the winning sound, change sound, and start hole light-emitting device (color) for each icon. In the figure, the time of determination corresponds to the above-mentioned "icon change effect determination process," and the time of update corresponds to the above-mentioned "icon change effect update process." The winning sound and change sound are the same when the ball lands in the first start hole 21 and when the ball lands in the second start hole 22.

When the default "normal icon" is displayed, a "ping-pong" sound is output from the speaker 10 as the winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
In the change scenario, for example, the icon does not change from a blue icon to a normal icon, so the column for update time is "-".
When the "normal icon" is displayed, the light emitted from the starting port light emitting device 21a is white.

When the "blue icon" is displayed, a "plonk" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball enters the starting hole.
When the normal icon changes to a blue icon, a "plonk" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound change sound at the time of updating.
Furthermore, when the "blue icon" is displayed, the light emitted from the starting port light emitting device 21a is blue.

When the "yellow icon" is displayed, a "keen" sound is output from the speaker 10 as the winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When the icon changes from a normal icon to a yellow icon or from a blue icon to a yellow icon, a high-pitched squeal is output from the speaker 10 as a sound indicating the change at the time of updating.
Furthermore, when the "yellow icon" is displayed, the light color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is yellow.

When the "green icon" is displayed, the sound "Ka-n" is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When the icon changes from a normal icon to a green icon, from a blue icon to a green icon, or from a yellow icon to a green icon, a "Kaan♪" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound indicating the change at the time of updating.
Furthermore, when the "green icon" is displayed, the light color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is green.

When the "red icon" is displayed, the sound "Ja-ki-n" is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When a normal icon changes to a red icon, when a blue icon changes to a red icon, when a yellow icon changes to a red icon, or when a green icon changes to a red icon, a "jack-o'-lantern" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound of change at the time of updating.
Furthermore, when the "red icon" is displayed, the light color of the starting port light emitting device 21a is red.

When the "rainbow icon" is displayed, the sound "Queen♪" is output from the speaker 10 as a winning sound when the ball lands in the starting hole.
When a normal icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a blue icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a yellow icon changes to a rainbow icon, when a green icon changes to a rainbow icon, or when a red icon changes to a rainbow icon, a "Queen" sound is output from the speaker 10 as a sound indicating the change at the time of updating.
When the "rainbow icon" is displayed, the light emitted from the starting port light emitting device 21a is a rainbow.

The light emitted by the start port light emitting device 21a may be turned off, for example, when the symbol variation game ends (a confirmation display is displayed). Furthermore, the timing of the erasure of the variation icon and the turning off of the start port light emitting device 21a may be different (for example, the erasure may occur earlier than the turning off, or the erasure may occur earlier than the turning off), or they may occur at the same time.

Next, we will explain the jackpot preview effect. The jackpot preview effect (an effect that suggests the possibility of a winning game being executed) is an effect determined in step S301-29 of Figure 31.

FIG. 35 shows a notice determination table 1, which is a table for determining a notice (pre-reach notice) that is executed from the start of the change to before a reach is formed in a symbol change game.
The table is stored in the sub-ROM 202, and defines the results of the special pattern hit determination process, the variable presentation pattern, distribution, and preview (contents). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the results of the special pattern hit determination process and the determined variable presentation pattern, and determines the preview (contents) using the extracted random number value for preview determination.

If the judgment result is a miss, if the change presentation pattern is a shortened change, no advance notice is always determined, if the change presentation pattern is a normal change, no advance notice is determined 80% of the time and a line advance notice is determined 20% of the time, and if the change presentation pattern is a normal reach, no advance notice is determined 70% of the time and a line advance notice is determined 30% of the time.
Furthermore, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 20% chance that no notice will be given, a 70% chance that a line notice will be given, and a 10% chance that a button vibration notice will be given; if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 80% chance that a line notice will be given, and a 20% chance that a button vibration notice will be given.

If the judgment result is a hit, if the variable presentation pattern is normal reach, there is a 30% chance that no notice will be given and a 70% chance that a line notice will be given, and if the variable presentation pattern is super reach 1, there is a 20% chance that no notice will be given, a 60% chance that a line notice will be given and a 20% chance that a button vibration notice will be given.
Furthermore, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 70% chance that a line preview will be determined, and a 30% chance that a button vibration preview will be determined; if the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 60% chance that a line preview will be determined, and a 40% chance that a button vibration preview will be determined.

The advance notice determination table 1 has the following characteristics.
The line announcement can be executed even when no reach is made, thereby eliminating boredom and preventing a decline in interest in the game.
Even when a Super Reach (miss, hit) is executed, no notice may be selected. This prevents disappointment when the pre-reach notice is not executed.
The button vibration notice can be executed in the super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation). This allows the player to know in advance that the super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation) will be executed when the button vibration notice is generated, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

For example, in Super Reach 1, if you miss, the dialogue announcement is more likely to be executed and the button vibration announcement is less likely to be executed than if you win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if you miss, the dialogue announcement is more likely to be executed and the button vibration announcement is less likely to be executed than if you win.
This increases the player's expectations for a winning game when the button vibration notice is executed, and allows the player to play the game while hoping that the button vibration notice will be executed.

Figure 36 is a dialogue preview determination table used to determine the details of dialogue previews. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 35.

If the judgment result is a miss, if the change presentation pattern is a normal change, the line (white) will always be determined, if the change presentation pattern is a normal reach, the line (white) will be determined 90% of the time, and the line (red) will be determined 10% of the time, if the change presentation pattern is a super reach 1, the line (white) will be determined 20% of the time, the line (red) will be determined 50% of the time, and two levels of line (red) will be determined 30% of the time.
If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 20% chance that a line (white) will be determined, a 40% chance that a line (red) will be determined, and a 40% chance that two levels of line (red) will be determined.

If the judgment result is a hit, if the variable presentation pattern is normal reach, there is a 50% chance that the line (white) will be determined, and a 50% chance that the line (red) will be determined; if the variable presentation pattern is super reach 1, there is a 10% chance that the line (white) will be determined, a 40% chance that the line (red) will be determined, and a 50% chance that two levels of line (red) will be determined.
If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, the dialogue (white) is determined at 10%, the dialogue (red) at 30%, and two stages of dialogue (red) at 60%.If the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, the dialogue (red) at 40% and two stages of dialogue (rainbow) are determined at 60%.

The dialogue preview determination table has the following characteristics:
For example, in a normal reach, in the case of a miss, the line (white) is more likely to be executed and the line (red) is less likely to be executed than in the case of a hit.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of a miss, the lines (white) and (red) are more likely to be executed, and the two stages of lines (red) are less likely to be executed, compared to the case of a hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of a miss, the lines (white) and (red) are more likely to be executed, and the two stages of lines (red) are less likely to be executed, compared to the case of a hit.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping for two stages of execution of the line (red) and then the line (red) again.

The white line can be executed even at super reach or higher (excluding full rotation reach). This prevents you from being disappointed when the white line appears.
The red line can be executed when the player is at or above a reach (normal reach, super reach 1, 2). This allows the player to know in advance that a reach or above (normal reach, super reach 1, 2) will be executed when the red line is displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
The two-stage red dialogue can be executed in Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, full spin). This allows the player to know in advance that the two-stage red dialogue will result in the execution of Super Reach or higher (Super Reach 1, 2, full spin), thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
The Rainbow Dialogue can only be performed during a Full Rotation Reach. This allows the Rainbow Dialogue to be linked to the Full Rotation Reach, allowing players to know in advance that a Full Rotation Reach will be performed.

Figure 37 is a button vibration notification determination table for determining the details of the button vibration notification. The basic determination method is the same as Figure 35.

If the result is a miss, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that one 2-second vibration will occur, and a 10% chance that three 2-second vibrations will occur. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 80% chance that one 2-second vibration will occur, and a 20% chance that three 2-second vibrations will occur.

If the result is a hit, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance that one 2-second vibration will occur, and a 30% chance that three 2-second vibrations will occur; if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance that one 2-second vibration will occur, and a 40% chance that three 2-second vibrations will occur; and if the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 30% chance that one 2-second vibration will occur, and a 70% chance that three 2-second vibrations will occur.

The button vibration notification determination table has the following characteristics:
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of a miss, 1 vibration per 2 seconds is more likely to be determined, and 3 vibrations per 2 seconds is less likely to be determined, compared to the case of a win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of a miss, 1 vibration per 2 seconds is more likely to be determined, and 3 vibrations per 2 seconds is less likely to be determined, compared to the case of a win.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping that two-second vibrations will be performed three times.

In a full rotation reach, the probability of three two-second vibrations being determined is higher than the probability of one two-second vibration being determined. This means that when three two-second vibrations are executed, the player's expectations can be raised all at once, increasing their interest in the game.

Note that since the dialogue preview is a preview executed by the image display device 26 and the button vibration preview is a preview executed by the effect button 14, both may be executed in a combined manner at the same time. This can instantly increase the player's expectations and enhance their interest in the game.

Here, the modes of dialogue preview and button vibration preview will be described with reference to Figures 42 and 43.
FIG. 42 shows the manner of dialogue preview.
(a1) shows the appearance of the dialogue (white), in which a dialogue image SE1 is uttered from a character during the variable display of each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d, saying, "Maybe we're close!?" The dialogue (white) is a dialogue image in which the background color in the speech bubble of the dialogue image SE1 is white, and the text portion is, for example, black. In addition, sound effect 1 is output along with the display of the dialogue image SE1, which also audibly indicates that the dialogue (white) has been displayed.

Then, when the dialogue image SE1 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds), the dialogue image SE1 disappears as shown in (a2), and then a reach may be formed as shown in (a3).

(b1) shows the appearance of the dialogue (red), in which the character utters the dialogue image SE2 saying "Chance!" while the decorative pattern images 26a-26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are displayed in a changing manner. The dialogue (red) is indicated by a red background color in the speech bubble of the dialogue image SE2, and the text portion is, for example, black. In addition, sound effect 2 is output along with the display of the dialogue image SE2, providing an auditory indication that the dialogue (red) has been displayed.

If it is a line (red), the line image SE2 will disappear after a predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, but if two lines (red) stages are performed, the mode shown in (b2) will occur, and the line image SE2 that began displaying in (b1) will remain displayed even after a predetermined time (e.g., 2.5 seconds) has elapsed, and then a line image SE3 is uttered from another character saying "Hot!" In the line image SE3, the background color in the speech bubble is also red, and the text portion is, for example, black. In addition, sound effect 2 is output along with the display of line image SE3, further audibly indicating that the line (red) has been displayed.

Then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display of dialogue image SE3, dialogue image SE2 and dialogue image SE3 are hidden, and a reach like that shown in (b3) is formed. In other words, the execution period for dialogue (red) is 2.5 seconds, and for two stages of dialogue (red), the execution period is 5.5 seconds.

In this way, dialogue (white) and dialogue (red) are displayed in a visually clearly different manner, and dialogue (red) and two-stage dialogue (red) are displayed in a visually clearly different manner, preventing it from being difficult to understand which dialogue preview has been executed.

Furthermore, sound effect 1 is output together with the display of the lines (white), and sound effect 2 is output together with the display of the lines (red), so that it is possible to prevent the situation where it is difficult to understand which line advance notice has been executed even through the auditory sense.
Furthermore, since sound effect 1 corresponds to dialogue (white) and sound effect 2 corresponds to dialogue (red), it can be said that the sound effects output along with the dialogue preview also suggest the degree of expectation for a winning game.

In the case of serifs (white), the background color is white and the text is black, but the background color may be black and the text may be white.
In other words, using a normal color means using "white" for either the background color or the characters.
Also, for the dialogue (red), the background color is red and the text is black, but the background color may be black and the text may be red.
In other words, using a specific color means using "red" for either the background color or the characters.
Furthermore, the text of the dialogue may be abstract (for example, "Maybe it's a reach!") or specific (for example, "It's a reach!").
Furthermore, before (a1) and (b1), a valid period for the effect button 14 may be set and an effect to prompt operation may be executed. This allows the player to feel as if he or she is participating in the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.
Furthermore, before (a1) and (b1), if an effective period of the effect button 14 is set and an operation prompt effect is executed, the line preview may not be executed if the effective period has elapsed without the effect button 14 being operated. This means that the line preview will not be executed unless the effect button 14 is operated, so that the effect button 14 can be actively operated.
Furthermore, audio corresponding to dialogue may be output on a channel separate from the channel on which background music is output. This makes it easier to understand what dialogue advance notice has been executed. On the other hand, audio corresponding to dialogue may not be output. This prevents the background music from becoming difficult to hear.

FIG. 43 shows the button vibration warning mode.
(a1) is a scene in which the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d start to change, and the effect button 14 does not vibrate.
(a2) is a scene a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since (a1), and in this scene, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds.
(b1) is the same scene as (a1), and (b2) is a scene a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has passed since (b1), in which the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds, then after an interval of 0.5 seconds, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds, then after an interval of 0.5 seconds, the effect button 14 vibrates once for 2 seconds.
That is, (a1) and (a2) are modes of vibration for 2 seconds x 1 time, and (b1) and (b2) are modes of vibration for 2 seconds x 3 times.
In this way, the vibrations are clearly different, which prevents the user from having difficulty understanding which button vibration notification has been executed.

Note that the button vibration notification differs in the number of vibrations, such as one 2-second vibration or three 2-second vibrations, but it may also differ in the vibration duration. For example, there may be a 2-second vibration and a 5-second vibration, and the 5-second vibration may be less likely to be selected when losing than the 2-second vibration, but more likely to be selected when winning.

38 is a notice determination table 2, which is a table for determining a notice to be executed when a reach is formed in a symbol change game (a notice during reach). The time when a reach is formed refers to the time when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c are temporarily stopped (for example, 4↓4).
The table is stored in the sub-ROM 202, and defines the results of the special pattern hit determination process, the variable presentation pattern, distribution, and preview (contents). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the results of the special pattern hit determination process and the determined variable presentation pattern, and determines the preview (contents) using the extracted random number value for preview determination.

When the judgment result is a miss, if the variable presentation pattern is a shortened variation, no advance notice is always determined, if the variable presentation pattern is a normal variation, no advance notice is always determined, and if the variable presentation pattern is a normal reach, no advance notice is always determined.
Furthermore, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 30% chance that no advance notice will be determined, a 60% chance that a logo advance notice will be determined, and a horde of cars advance notice will be determined in 10% of cases; if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 35% chance that no advance notice will be determined, a 60% chance that a logo advance notice will be determined, and a horde of cars advance notice will be determined in 5% of cases.

If the result of the judgment is a hit, if the variable presentation pattern is normal reach, no advance notice will always be determined, and if the variable presentation pattern is super reach 1, there is a 10% chance that no advance notice will be determined, a 40% chance that a logo advance notice will be determined, and a 60% chance that a group of cars advance notice will be determined.
Also, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 10% chance that no preview will be displayed, a 55% chance that a logo preview will be displayed, and a 35% chance that a car swarm preview will be displayed; if the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, there is a 40% chance that a logo preview will be displayed and a 60% chance that a car swarm preview will be displayed.

The advance notice determination table 2 has the following characteristics.
Both the logo announcement and the car group announcement can be performed in super reach or higher (super reach 1, 2, full rotation), but are not performed in normal reach. This allows the player to play while hoping that the logo announcement or car group announcement will be performed when a reach is formed.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of a miss, no notice or logo notice is more likely to be executed, and the car group notice is less likely to be executed, compared to the case of a win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of a miss, no notice or logo notice is more likely to be executed, and a car group notice is less likely to be executed, compared to the case of a win.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations for a winning game when the car horde prediction is executed, and allows the player to play the game while hoping that the car horde prediction will be executed.

Figure 39(a) is a logo preview determination table for determining the details of the logo preview, and Figure 39(b) is a vehicle horde preview determination table for determining the details of the vehicle horde preview. The basic determination method is the same as Figure 38.

The logo preview determination table shows that if the result is a miss, if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that it will be a chance and a 10% chance that it will be a super hot one; if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is an 85% chance that it will be a chance and a 15% chance that it will be a super hot one.

If the result is a hit, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance that it will be a chance and a 30% chance that it will be a super hot one; if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance that it will be a chance and a 40% chance that it will be a super hot one; and if the variable presentation pattern is Full Spin Reach, there is a 50% chance that it will be a chance and a 50% chance that it will be a super hot one.

The logo announcement table has the following features:
For example, in Super Reach 1, if there is a miss, chance is more likely to be executed and super heat is less likely to be executed than if there is a hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if you miss, chance is more likely to be executed and super heat is less likely to be executed than if you win.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping for the super heat to be executed.

When comparing Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, Chance is more likely to occur with Super Reach 1, while Super Heat is more likely to occur with Super Reach 2. This makes it easier to predict which Super Reach will occur later based on which logo announcement is made.

The car group prediction determination table shows that if the result of the judgment is a miss, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is an 80% chance that the first car group will be determined, and a 20% chance that the second car group will be determined; and if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 70% chance that the first car group will be determined, and a 30% chance that the second car group will be determined.

If the result is a hit, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, the first group of cars will be determined with a 60% chance, and the second group of cars with a 40% chance; if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, the first group of cars will be determined with a 50% chance, and the second group of cars with a 50% chance; and if the variable presentation pattern is Full Rotation Reach, the first group of cars will be determined with a 40% chance, and the second group of cars with a 60% chance.

The vehicle group advance notice determination table has the following features:
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of a miss, the first car group is more likely to be executed and the second car group is less likely to be executed than in the case of a win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of a miss, the first car group is more likely to be executed and the second car group is less likely to be executed than in the case of a win.
This allows the player to play the game while hoping that the second car group will be executed.

When comparing Super Reach 1 and Super Reach 2, Super Reach 1 is more likely to be executed for the first car group, while Super Reach 2 is more likely to be executed for the second car group. This makes it easier to predict which Super Reach will be executed later based on which car group announcement is executed.

In a full rotation reach, the second group of cars is more likely to be executed than the first group of cars. This means that when the second group of cars is executed, the player's expectations for a winning game can be greatly increased.

Here, the aspects of the logo preview and car group preview will be explained using Figures 44 to 46.
FIG. 44 shows the logo preview mode.
(a1) is a scene in which the decorative pattern images 26a-26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are undergoing a variable display, and (a2) is a scene in which four symbols are temporarily displayed on the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c, forming a reach. A logo preview is displayed above each decorative pattern image 26a-26c as soon as a reach is formed. For example, in (a2), a logo image log1 labeled "chance" is displayed. This logo image log1 is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) and then becomes invisible, after which a super reach 1 or the like can be executed.

(b1) is the same as (a1), and (b2) displays the logo image log2 with the words "super hot." This logo image log2 is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds), then disappears, after which Super Reach 1 and other moves can be executed.

In this way, Chance and Super Hot are displayed in a clearly different visual manner, preventing any difficulty in understanding which logo announcement has been executed.

Incidentally, since the expectation of a winning game is higher for "Super Hot" than for "Chance", it would be possible to display "Chance" in green and "Super Hot" in red, as in the relationship between the icon colors described in Figure 34. This would suggest that the expectation is high not only through the text content but also through the color.

In addition, the speaker 10 may output the sound "Chance" in conjunction with the display of Chance, or the speaker 10 may output the sound "Super Hot" in conjunction with the display of Super Hot. This allows the likelihood of a win to be indicated not only visually but also aurally, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Figure 45 shows an example of executing a logo announcement in a variable performance that performs a pseudo-consecutive win.
(a2) and (b2) are the same as (a2) and (b2) in FIG.
In (a3) and (b3), after the logo image is no longer displayed, the game does not transition to a super reach or the like, but instead a "pseudo" image gz, which suggests the execution of a pseudo consecutive win, is displayed temporarily as a middle decorative pattern image 26b.
Even when the "pseudo" image gz is temporarily displayed as the middle decorative pattern image 26b, the fourth pattern image 26d continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

Then, the "pseudo" image gz is temporarily displayed as a medium decorative pattern image 26b, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in (a4) and (b4), "x2" is displayed to indicate a pseudo-consecutive 2, and each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c that were temporarily displayed is displayed in a variable manner.
Thereafter, in (a5) and (b5), the same display as in (a2) and (b2) is performed. That is, a second reach is formed and a second logo image is displayed.

The logo image is displayed for the first time at (a2) and (b2) and for the second time at (a5) and (b5), but regardless of the number of times it is displayed, the expectation of a winning game being executed is constant.
In other words, whether the first display is made at (a2) or (b2) and then the game moves to a super reach or the like without a second display, or whether the second display is made at (a5) or (b5) and then the game moves to a super reach or the like, the expectation of a winning game being executed remains constant.

On the other hand, as mentioned in the section on pseudo consecutive wins, the more times a pseudo consecutive win occurs, the higher the expectation. Therefore, while the expectation level changes depending on the number of pseudo consecutive wins, the expectation level for the logo announcement when a reach is formed during a pseudo consecutive win remains constant regardless of the number of times it is displayed. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand, as it simply counts the number of pseudo consecutive wins, without the hassle of having to count both the number of pseudo consecutive wins and the number of times the logo image is displayed.

It is also possible to change the expectation of a winning game being executed depending on the number of times the logo image is displayed.
In addition, as the number of pseudo consecutive wins increases, the rank of the logo image may be upgraded (for example, from Chance to Super Hot).
Also, the logo image may be displayed only when the final reach is formed after the pseudo consecutive wins have ended, or may be displayed only when the first reach is formed.

FIG. 46 shows an example of a vehicle group advance notice.
(a1) and (b1) are scenes in which the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d are variably displayed, and (a2) and (b2) are scenes in which four patterns are temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern image 26a and the right decorative pattern image 26c, and a reach is formed. Unlike the logo preview, the car group preview is executed in such a manner that an image resembling a plurality of cars moves from the right end to the left end of the image display device 26 after a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the reach was formed.

(a3) shows the display mode of the first vehicle group, with multiple vehicle group images car1 that make up the first vehicle group displayed. (b3) shows the display mode of the second vehicle group, with multiple vehicle group images car2 that make up the second vehicle group displayed. In either case, it takes about two seconds from the start to the end of the display of the vehicle group images, and once the display of the vehicle group images has ended, Super Reach 1 and other actions can then be performed.

In this way, the first vehicle group and the second vehicle group are displayed in a clearly different visual manner, preventing the driver from having difficulty understanding which vehicle group warning has been executed.

Note that both the logo preview and the car group preview may be determined in one variable performance, or only one of them may be determined.

Figure 40(a) is a notice determination table 3, which is a table for determining the notice to be executed during a super reach (super reach notice) in a pattern change game.
The table is stored in the sub-ROM 202, and defines the results of the special pattern hit determination process, the variable presentation pattern, distribution, and preview (contents). The sub-CPU 201 refers to the results of the special pattern hit determination process and the determined variable presentation pattern, and determines the preview (contents) using the extracted random number value for preview determination.

If the result is a miss, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is an 80% chance that conversation (white) will occur, and a 20% chance that conversation (red) will occur. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance that conversation (white) will occur, and a 10% chance that conversation (red) will occur.

If the result is a hit, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 60% chance that conversation (white) will occur, and a 40% chance that conversation (red) will occur; and if the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 50% chance that conversation (white) will occur, and a 50% chance that conversation (red) will occur.

The advance notice determination table 3 has the following characteristics.
For example, in Super Reach 1, if you miss, the conversation (white) is more likely to be executed and the conversation (red) is less likely to be executed than if you win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, if you miss, the conversation (white) is more likely to be executed and the conversation (red) is less likely to be executed than if you win.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of a winning game when the conversation (red) is carried out, and to make the player play the game while hoping that the conversation (red) will be carried out.

Figure 40(b) shows Pre-Announcement Determination Table 4, which is a table used to determine the announcements to be executed during a Super Reach (Super Reach Pre-Announcement) in a symbol change game. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 40(a).

If the result is a miss, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 90% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 10% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 10% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur.

If the result is a hit, and the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 70% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 30% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur. If the variable presentation pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 60% chance that a cut-in (green) will occur, and a 40% chance that a cut-in (red) will occur.

The advance notice determination table 4 has the following characteristics.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of a miss, a cut-in (green) is more likely to be executed and a cut-in (red) is less likely to be executed than in the case of a hit.
For example, in Super Reach 2, in the case of a miss, a cut-in (green) is more likely to be executed and a cut-in (red) is less likely to be executed than in the case of a hit.
This increases the player's expectations for a winning game when a cut-in (red) is executed, and allows the player to play the game while hoping that a cut-in (red) will be executed.

In addition, if the valid period has elapsed without the effect button 14 being operated, the cut-in notice may not be executed. This means that the cut-in notice will not be executed unless the effect button 14 is operated, allowing players to actively operate the effect button 14. On the other hand, for players who do not want to know the expected probability of a winning game from the cut-in notice, the cut-in notice will not be executed unless the effect button 14 is operated, so the needs of such players can be met.

Figure 41(c) shows the notice determination table 5, which is a table used to determine the notice (judgment effect) that will be executed during a super reach in a symbol change game. The basic determination method is the same as in Figure 40(a).

The judgment effect is an effect that is performed at the timing when the result of the special symbol hit determination process during a Super Reach is announced, and it notifies the player whether the result is a hit or a miss by having the player operate the effect button 14 or effect lever 15 (or, if no operation is performed, the valid operation period passes). A button image bg that resembles the effect button 14 or an effect lever image leg that resembles the effect lever 15 is displayed immediately before the result is announced (see Figure 48), so the display of these images alone is considered a preview, and the series of effects from the display of these images to the announcement of the result is the judgment effect.

If the result is a miss, and the variable effect pattern is Super Reach 1, there is an 80% chance that the effect button will be selected and a 20% chance that the effect lever will be selected; and if the variable effect pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 90% chance that the effect button will be selected and a 10% chance that the effect lever will be selected.

If the result is a hit, and the variable effect pattern is Super Reach 1, there is a 60% chance that the effect button will be selected and a 40% chance that the effect lever will be selected; and if the variable effect pattern is Super Reach 2, there is a 50% chance that the effect button will be selected and a 50% chance that the effect lever will be selected.

The advance notice determination table 5 has the following features.
For example, in Super Reach 1, in the case of a miss, the effect button is more likely to be executed and the effect lever is less likely to be executed than in the case of a win.
For example, in Super Reach 2, when there is a miss, the effect button is more likely to be executed and the effect lever is less likely to be executed than when there is a hit.
This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation of a winning game when the effect lever is operated, and allows the player to play the game while hoping that the effect lever will be operated.

The judgment effect, which requires the operation of the effect button 14 or effect lever 15, may be performed in either Super Reach 1 or Super Reach 2, as shown in Figure 41, or in just one of them. If it is performed in just one of them, the other may be configured to announce the judgment result without requiring any operation.

FIG. 47 shows the form of a cut-in preview.
(a1) and (b1) show a scene in which the game has transitioned to a super reach (for example, super reach 1), and the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c are moved to the top right of the display area and displayed in a reduced size.

(a2) and (b2) are scenes where a predetermined time has passed since the transition to Super Reach (e.g., Super Reach 1), and an operation prompt is being displayed in the display area. In the operation prompt in the cut-in preview, a button image bg that resembles the effect button 14 is displayed, and no image saying "Press!" or sound saying "Press" is output.

In other words, if the cut-in notice is not to be executed after the valid period has elapsed without the effect button 14 being operated, the image "Press!" is not displayed and the sound "Press" is not output, thereby taking into consideration players who do not want to know the likelihood of a winning game from the cut-in notice. In addition, if the cut-in notice is to be executed after the valid period has elapsed without the effect button 14 being operated, the image "Press!" can be displayed and the sound "Press" can be output. This actively encourages players to operate the effect button 14.

(a3) shows the display mode of a cut-in (green), with the cut-in image ci1 displayed with the word "chance" written in green. Also, (b3) shows the display mode of a cut-in (red), with the cut-in image ci2 displayed with the word "chance" written in red. In either case, it takes about three seconds from the start to the end of the cut-in image display, and shortly after the cut-in image display ends, the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be announced. In other words, the cut-in preview is a preview effect that is executed just before the result of the determination is announced.

In this way, the cut-in preview (green) and the cut-in preview (red) are displayed in a visually distinct manner, preventing any difficulty in understanding which cut-in preview has been executed.

FIG. 48 shows the form of the judge presentation.
(a1) and (b1) are scenes from a conversation preview during a super reach (e.g., super reach 2), in which the enemy character chaB is displayed and a conversation image con4-1 such as "Let's go" is displayed in white text. Also, a voice such as "Let's go" is output from the speaker 10.

The conversation preview is a preview that is executed during the performance in which ally character chaA (see Figure 49, etc.) and enemy character chaB face off against each other. A conversation between ally character chaA and enemy character chaB takes place in the lower center of the display area, and the text color (e.g., white text, red text) of the conversation image con4-1 is a preview that suggests the possibility of a winning game being executed (details of the format are described in Figures 49 to 51).

(a2) and (b2) are scenes in which the results of the special symbol hit determination process are announced, and in these scenes, an operation promotion effect is executed. For example, in (a2), to encourage operation of the effect button 14, a button image bg and "Press!" are displayed, and the audio "Press" is also output. On the other hand, in (b2), to encourage operation of the effect lever 15, a lever image leg and "Pull!" are displayed, and the audio "Pull" is also output.

The result of the determination is then notified when the valid operation period has elapsed, or when the effect button 14 has been operated in the case of (a2), or when the effect lever 15 has been operated in the case of (b2).
For example, if there is a win, as shown in (a3) and (b3), the movable body 28 moves to the operating position (performs the movable body operation effect), and the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c are displayed temporarily stopped at "444" in the upper right corner of the display area, thereby indicating a win. On the other hand, if there is a loss, although not shown, the movable body 28 does not move to the operating position (remains at the origin position), and the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c are displayed temporarily stopped at "454" in the upper right corner of the display area, thereby indicating a win.

Next, the conversation preview will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 49 to 51.
Figure 49 (a1) (b1) shows a scene in which the game has transitioned to a super reach (for example, super reach 2), and each of the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c has moved to the top right of the display area and is displayed in a reduced size.

(a2) shows the start of the conversation preview, in which the conversation image con1-1 is displayed in white (white letters) and the ally character chaA says, "Let's go!". Also, the speaker 10 outputs a voice saying, "Let's go!"
(b2) differs from (a2) only in that the conversation image con1-2, which says "Let's play," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters). For convenience, the "red" characters (red letters) are written in bolder than the "white" characters (white letters). The "red" characters (red letters) correspond to the conversation (red) in FIG. 40(a), and the "white" characters (white letters) correspond to the conversation (white) in FIG. 40(a).
In addition, in conversation previews, there is no difference in the probability of winning depending on the sound (sound effect) like in dialogue previews. For example, a sound such as "It's time to win" is output, but the same sound is output whether the text is white or red.

(a3) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which, in response to the conversation uttered by the friendly character chaA in (a2), a conversation image con2-1 is displayed in white text (white letters) from the enemy character chaB saying, "There's no chance of winning." Also, a voice saying, "There's no chance of winning," is output from the speaker 10.
(b3) differs from (a3) only in that the conversation image con2-2, which says "You have no chance of winning," is displayed in "red" letters (red letters).

(a4) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which a conversation image con3-1 is displayed in white (white letters) in which the friendly character chaA says, "I won't lose," in response to the conversation uttered by the enemy character chaB in (a3). Also, a voice saying, "I won't lose," is output from the speaker 10.
(b4) differs from (a4) only in that the conversation image con3-2, "I won't lose," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).

50(a5) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which a conversation image con4-1 is displayed in white (white letters) saying "Let's go" from enemy character chaB in response to the conversation uttered by ally character chaA in (a4). Also, a voice saying "Let's go" is output from speaker 10.
(b5) differs from (a5) only in that the conversation image con4-2, such as "Let's go," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).
Note that (a5), (b5), (a6), (b6), (a7), and (b7) are the same as the scenes in Figure 48, so their explanation will be omitted.

When the result of the determination is announced at (a7) and (b7), the ally character chaA is displayed again at (a8), and the conversation image con5-1 saying "Your training has paid off" is displayed in "white" characters (white letters). Also, a voice saying "Your training has paid off" is output from the speaker 10.
(b8) differs from (a8) only in that the conversation image con5-2, "Your training has paid off," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).

51 (a9) shows a continuation of the conversation preview, in which a conversation image con6-1 is displayed in white (white letters) in response to the conversation uttered by the friendly character chaA in (a8), in which the enemy character chaB says "Well done..." Also, a voice saying "Well done" is output from the speaker 10.
(b9) differs from (a9) only in that the conversation image con6-2, such as "wonderful," is displayed in "red" characters (red letters).

The execution period from (a2) (b2), which is the start of the conversation preview, to (a9) (b9), which is the end of the conversation preview, is, for example, about 25 seconds.
In other words, the execution period is longer than the execution period of the line preview (red) (2.5 seconds) and the execution period of the two-stage line (red) (5.5 seconds).
This prevents the line announcement made before the reach from becoming redundant and decreasing interest in the game, and the conversation announcement made before the judge performance can increase interest in the game by stirring up the tension of whether or not the game will be won for a long period of time.

In addition, with conversation previews, where the probability of winning does not change depending on the number of times the conversation (red) is displayed, there is no need to count the number of times the conversation (red) is displayed over a long period of time, allowing players to focus on the conversation preview. On the other hand, with line previews, where the probability of winning changes depending on the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed, it is necessary to count the number of times the dialogue (red) is displayed over a short period of time, allowing players to focus on the line preview.

Then, at (a10) and (b10), each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c temporarily stops at "444" and the effect button 14 vibrates for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) (executing the button vibration effect when a win occurs), and at (a11) and (b11), each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c confirms at "444" and the vibration of the effect button 14 stops.

In this way, in the conversation preview, ally character chaA and enemy character chaB have a conversation, and the difference in the text color of the conversation image suggests the degree of expectation for a winning game. Specifically, "red" text (red text) suggests a higher degree of expectation for a winning game than "white" text (white text), so as with other previews (for example, dialogue previews and hold preview effects), it is possible to create a common understanding that "red" indicates a higher degree of expectation. This allows players to play while hoping that "red" text (red text) will be displayed.

In addition, even after the judgment result (win) is announced in (a7) and (b7), (a8), (b8), and (a9) and (b9) continue to use the same text color as before (a7) and (b7). In other words, after (a7), the conversation announcements for (a8) and (a9) continue to be displayed in "white" text (white text), and after (b8), the conversation announcements for (b8) and (b9) continue to be displayed in "red" text (red text). This allows for a sense of unity until the confirmation display, allowing the player to transition to a winning game without feeling uncomfortable. Furthermore, since the entire conversation announcement only needs to be the same color, simple processing can be performed, which is expected to reduce the control load.

In addition, the "white" characters (white letters) in the conversation preview may be displayed using only white, or the entire character may be white with only the edges of the character in black to improve visibility.
Similarly, the "red" letters (red letters) in the conversation preview may be displayed using only red, or the entire letters may be red to improve visibility, but only the edges of the letters may be black, etc.
In any case, using normal colors means that white is used for some or all of the text in the conversation preview, and using specific colors means that red is used for some or all of the text in the conversation preview.

Figures 49 to 51 only show examples of winning, not losing. However, in the case of a losing, (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9) are not performed, and after announcing a loss with (a7) and (b7), (a10) and (b10) display a temporary stop of the losing symbol combination, and (a11) and (b11) display the final losing symbol combination. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable if a conversation announcement is made in "red" letters (red letters), especially if (b8) and (b9) are also made in "red" letters (red letters).

On the other hand, if the result is a miss, the conversation announcements in (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9) may be made. This makes it easier to recognize which text color the conversation announcement was made in even after the miss has been announced, making it easier to look back and check how highly anticipated the announcements were.

Also, (a8), (b8), (a9), and (b9) may be uniformly displayed in "white" text (white letters) to announce the conversation. This allows the player to enjoy the conversation announcement even after the result of the determination has been announced, while preventing the player from having strange expectations (for example, that the reach will develop further).

Furthermore, for example, if the conversation preview in Figure 49 (a2) is set to one, the number of conversation previews may be set arbitrarily. For example, the conversation preview may consist of four previews, or six previews. Any of these may be included, or both may be included. Note that, regardless of the number of previews, the execution period must be longer than the execution period (e.g., 5.5 seconds) of the two-stage dialogue (red) in the dialogue preview.

FIG. 52 is a simplified time chart (normal game state) summarizing the above-mentioned preview effects.
In this time chart, we will mainly explain the relationship between the expected probability of winning due to differences in preview effects.

When the change starts at timing T1, the line preview can be executed. In case 1, the line (red) above (line image SE1) is executed, and in case 2, the line (red) above (line image SE1) and the line (red) below (line image SE2) are executed.
In this case, the probability of winning is higher in case 2, and when comparing the dialogue previews with the dialogue (red), it can be said that the more lines there are, the higher the probability of winning.

When a reach (normal reach) occurs at timing T2, a logo announcement can be made. In case 1, a chance (logo image log1) is made once, and in case 2, a pseudo consecutive win (e.g., pseudo consecutive win 3) is made, and the chance (logo image log1) is made three times.
In this case, when comparing the number of executions of the chance (logo image log1), excluding the number of pseudo consecutive wins, the probability of winning is equal (unchanged) in both Case 1 and Case 2. In other words, unlike the case of a line preview, where the probability of winning changes depending on the number of times, the probability of winning is constant whether the logo preview is executed once or three times.

When a super reach occurs at timing T3, a conversation preview can be executed. In case 1, a conversation preview consisting of four conversations is executed: Conversation 1 (red) ally (character), Conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), Conversation 3 (red) ally (character), and Conversation 4 (red) enemy (character), and in case 2, a conversation preview consisting of six conversations is executed: Conversation 1 (red) ally (character), Conversation 2 (red) enemy (character), Conversation 3 (red) ally (character), Conversation 4 (red) enemy (character), Conversation 5 (red) ally (character), and Conversation 6 (red) enemy (character).
In this case, the probability of winning is equal (unchanged) in both Case 1 and Case 2. In other words, unlike dialogue previews where the probability of winning changes depending on the number of times, in the conversation preview, the probability of winning varies depending on the text color, but does not vary depending on the number of times. For example, the probability of winning remains constant whether the conversation (red) is displayed once or twice, and remains constant whether it is displayed four times as in Case 1 or six times as in Case 2.

At timing T4, it is time to execute the judge effect, and the judge effect can be executed. In case 1, the effect button is executed in the judge effect, and in case 2, the effect lever is executed in the judge effect.
In this case, the expected probability of winning is higher in case 2.

At timing T5, when it is time to announce the judgment result in the judge performance, the judgment result is announced. If a hit is announced in the judgment result announcement, a conversation preview can be further executed (see Figures 50 (a8) (b8), 51 (a9) (b9)). In case 1, a conversation preview consisting of two conversations, Conversation 1 (red) Ally (character) and Conversation 2 (red) Enemy (character), is executed, and in case 2, a conversation preview consisting of four conversations, Conversation 1 (red) Ally (character), Conversation 2 (red) Enemy (character), Conversation 3 (red) Ally (character), and Conversation 4 (red) Enemy (character), is executed.
In this case, since the judgment result has already been announced at timing T5, the probability of winning is equal (unchanged) in both Case 1 and Case 2, and the probability of the game state being played is also equal (unchanged). In other words, in this scene, whether the conversation notice (red) is played two or four times, the probability of winning is constant, and the probability of the game state being played is also constant. After that, the game is stopped at timing T6.

Furthermore, when the result of the hit determination is announced at timing T5, a moving object movement effect (see Figure 48) or a button vibration effect upon hit (see Figure 51) is executed. However, these effects are executed when the result of the hit determination is announced, and the expected execution probability does not change depending on the number of conversations (red) in the conversation preview. For example, the expected execution probability of an effect remains constant whether the conversation (red) is displayed once or twice, and whether it is displayed four times as in Case 1 or six times as in Case 2. In other words, regardless of the number of times the conversation (red) is executed (displayed), the expected execution probability of a specific effect (e.g., a moving object movement effect, a button vibration effect upon hit) executed after the conversation preview ends remains constant. This eliminates the need to count the number of times the conversation (red) is executed (displayed), allowing the player to focus on the conversation preview.

In this way, in variable effects where "red" is executed in the line preview and "red" is executed in the conversation preview, the probability of winning changes depending on the number of times the line preview is executed, but the probability of winning does not change depending on the number of times the conversation preview is executed. In other words, from timing T1 to timing T2, the player's interest is in whether or not a reach will be achieved, and the player is paying close attention to the various preview effects. In such a scene, by making the probability of winning vary depending on the number of times the line preview (red) is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict subsequent developments (for example, whether or not a super reach will be executed). The same concept applies to the button vibration preview (see Figure 37) that can be executed in this scene.

On the other hand, from timing T3 to timing T4, the player is interested in whether or not they will win, and is paying more attention to the "color" than the number of times the preview is executed. In other words, in this situation, if it is a cut-in preview, they would prefer "red" to be executed (displayed) rather than "green," and if it is a conversation preview, they would prefer "red" to be executed (displayed) rather than "white." Therefore, before simply notifying whether they have won or lost, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from becoming confusing for the player, as the probability of winning differs depending on the number of times the preview is executed.
In other words, depending on the situation (depending on what the player is focusing on), it is set to prioritize whether the number of times the notice is executed or the color of the notice, so that notices can be executed in a balanced manner throughout the entire variable presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the line preview executed at timing T1 to timing T2, there is a difference in the expected success rate due to sound (sound effect) between the line (white) and the line (red), but in the conversation preview executed at timing T3 to timing T4, there is no difference in the expected success rate due to sound (sound effect) between the white characters and the red characters.
This allows for suitable sound effects to be performed according to each scene. For example, in a scene where there is interest in whether or not a win will occur (a dialogue preview), differences in the probability of winning can be made by sound (differences made by display and sound), which can make the developments after the win more interesting.
On the other hand, in situations where the player is interested in whether or not they will win (conversational announcement), by not providing a difference in the probability of winning due to sound (the difference is made only by display), it is possible to prevent the player's concentration from being hindered by providing more information than necessary.

Figure 53 is a simple time chart (time-saving game mode, special game mode) that summarizes the above-mentioned preview effects.
In this time chart, we will mainly explain the relationship between the expected probability of winning due to differences in preview effects.

In the time-saving game state or the probability variation game state, reserved memory is likely to be stored, so if there is a loss, it is easy to execute the super shortened variation or shortened variation, and if there is a win, it is easy to execute the super reach. In other words, if a super reach is executed, there is a tendency that a win is likely to be announced at timing T4.
In line with this trend, the preview performance is also designed to mainly execute icon change performances between timing T1 and timing T2, so that, for example, if the icon is "blue", it is difficult for a super reach to be executed, and if the icon is "green" or "red", it is easy for a super reach to be executed.

Between timings T2 and T3, conversation announcements can be made, just like in the normal game state. Even in this situation, whether the conversation announcement (red) is made four times (Case 1) or six times (Case 2), the probability of winning is equal (no change).
Furthermore, timing T3 to timing T4 and timing T4 to timing T5 are the same as in the normal gaming state, so explanations will be omitted.

In this way, in time-saving game mode and probability variable game mode, if a miss occurs, it is easier to execute super-shortened or shortened variations, making it more difficult to execute differences in the likelihood of winning due to differences in the number of times advance notices are executed compared to normal game mode. For example, dialogue advance notices are not executed. This allows advance notices to be executed in line with the characteristics of the game mode, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, using Figure 54, an example of game number display (variation pattern 2) will be explained.
54 shows an example of the updated display of the game number counter image 26p and the game number image 26q when variation pattern 2 is executed. For convenience of explanation, some of the displayed objects of the image display device 26 are omitted, but it is assumed that they are actually displayed.

First, at timing T1, the variation starts. At this time, both the game number counter image 26p and the game number image 26q are displayed, and for example, the game number counter image 26p displays "100 games remaining" at the bottom left of the display area, and the game number image 26q displays "798 games" at the top left of the display area.
In addition, each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is displayed in a changing manner, and the changing icon is displayed in the changing icon display area 26o, and a hold icon is displayed in the first starting port first hold ball image display area 26g.

Then, as the variable time passes and timing T2 is reached, commands 19, 21, and 22 (see Figures 10 and 11) are sent from the main control board 100, indicating that the performance control board 200 has received those commands.

Then, at timing T3, the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c are displayed as a confirmed miss of "528", and the symbol variation game is ended (variation is stopped).
At this time, the game number counter image 26p is decremented by 1 to show "99 games remaining," and the game number image 26q is incremented by 1 to show "799 games."
In addition, the variable icon is erased from the variable icon display area 26o.

Although not shown, the number of symbol variation games displayed on the external information display at this time is "799."
In other words, the "value indicated by the game number image 26q" = "the number of pattern change games displayed on the external information display," and the number of pattern change games from a predetermined timing can be recognized from the game number image 26q without visually checking the external information display.

Next, using Figure 55, we will explain an example of game number display (variation pattern 3).
Figure 55 is an example of the updated display of the number of games played counter image 26p and the number of games played image 26q when variation pattern 3 is executed.

First, at timing T1, the variation starts. At this time, both the game number counter image 26p and the game number image 26q are displayed, and for example, the game number counter image 26p displays "100 games remaining" at the bottom left of the display area, and the game number image 26q displays "798 games" at the top left of the display area.
In addition, each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is displayed in a changing manner, and the changing icon is displayed in the changing icon display area 26o, and a hold icon is displayed in the first starting port first hold ball image display area 26g.

Then, as the variable time passes and timing T2 is reached, a normal reach with 5 symbols begins. Even when a normal reach begins, both the number of games counter image 26p and the number of games image 26q remain displayed.

Then, as the variable time passes and timing T3 is reached, commands 19, 21, and 22 (see Figures 10 and 11) are sent from the main control board 100, indicating that the performance control board 200 has received those commands.

Then, at timing T4, each decorative symbol image is displayed as a miss of "535", and the symbol variation game ends (variation is stopped).
At this time, the game number counter image 26p is decremented by 1 to show "99 games remaining," and the game number image 26q is incremented by 1 to show "799 games."
In addition, the variable icon is erased from the variable icon display area 26o.

Although not shown, the number of symbol variation games displayed on the external information display at this time is "799."
In other words, the value indicated by the game number image 26q is equal to the number of pattern change games displayed on the external information display, and the number of pattern change games from a predetermined timing can be recognized from the game number image 26q without visually checking the external information display.

Furthermore, since the normal reach is configured so that the selection rate is high when it is a miss and multiple notifications are unlikely to be executed, it can be said that even if the number of plays counter image 26p and the number of games image 26q are continuously displayed, there is little risk of reduced visibility (for example, the display of the number of games image 26q making the notification image difficult to see).
This makes it possible to realize the display (preferable display) of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q according to the situation.

Next, using Figure 57, an example of game number display (variation pattern 4) will be explained.
FIG. 57 is an example of the updated display of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q when variation pattern 4 is executed.

First, at timing T1, the variation starts. At this time, both the game number counter image 26p and the game number image 26q are displayed, and for example, the game number counter image 26p displays "100 games remaining" at the bottom left of the display area, and the game number image 26q displays "798 games" at the top left of the display area.
In addition, each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is displayed in a changing manner, and the changing icon is displayed in the changing icon display area 26o, and a hold icon is displayed in the first starting port first hold ball image display area 26g.

Then, as the variable time passes and timing T2 is reached, a normal reach with 5 symbols begins. Even when a normal reach begins, both the number of games counter image 26p and the number of games image 26q remain displayed.

Then, at timing T3 during the normal reach, a car group notice is executed.
At timing T3, the game number counter image 26p and the game number image 26q are hidden so as not to interfere with the car group preview which uses the entire display area.

Then, when the execution of the car horde preview is completed, it progresses to a Super Reach (referred to as SP Reach) at timing T4. Even when it progresses to a Super Reach, the number of plays counter image 26p and the number of games image 26q remain hidden. Also, at this timing, the reserved icon displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g becomes hidden. This prevents the visibility of the Super Reach-related effects from being impaired.

Then, when a super reach is executed and timing T5 is reached, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is announced. In this example, variation pattern 4 corresponds to a miss, so the result is announced by displaying an image such as "Lose..." or by displaying each decorative symbol image 26a-26c temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a miss (in this example, "565"). Even when the result is announced, the number of plays counter image 26p and the number of games image 26q remain hidden.

Then, after the notification of the judgment result is carried out for a predetermined time, when timing T6 is reached, the display of a background switching image begins. This background switching image is an image that is displayed across the entire display area for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) when switching back from the background image during a Super Reach to the background image at the start of the change, and examples of this include an eye-catching image, door image, sliding door image, blackout, whiteout, etc.

Then, at timing T7, the display of the background switching image ends. Once the display of the background switching image ends, the play count counter image 26p, game count image 26q, and reserve icon image are displayed. That is, the messages "100 plays remaining," "798 games," and the reserve icon in the first start port first reserve ball image display area 26g are displayed. Also, each decorative pattern image is temporarily stopped at "565." In other words, at timing T7, the play count counter image 26p, game count image 26q, and reserve icon image, which had been hidden, are redisplayed (and become visible at the same time).

Then, as the variable time passes and timing T8 is reached, commands 19, 21, and 22 (see Figures 10 and 11) are sent from the main control board 100, indicating that the performance control board 200 has received those commands.

Then, at timing T9, each decorative symbol image is displayed as a miss of "565", and the symbol variation game ends (variation is stopped).
At this time, although not shown, the game number counter image 26p is decremented by 1 to show "99 games remaining," and the game number image 26q is incremented by 1 to show "799 games."
In addition, the variable icon is erased from the variable icon display area 26o.

Although not shown, the number of symbol variation games displayed on the external information display at this time is "799."
In other words, the "value indicated by the game number image 26q" = "the number of pattern change games displayed on the external information display," and the number of pattern change games from a predetermined timing can be recognized from the game number image 26q without visually checking the external information display.

Furthermore, since multiple notifications are likely to be executed even in the case of a Super Reach miss (and of course also in the case of a win), if the number of games counter image 26p and the number of games played image 26q are continuously displayed, there is a high risk that visibility will be reduced (for example, the display of the number of games played image 26q will make it difficult to see the notification image). Therefore, the number of games counter image 26p and the number of games played image 26q are not displayed from timing T3 to timing T7.
This makes it possible to realize the display (preferable display) of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q according to the situation.

In the variation effect based on variation pattern 4 (miss, super reach 1), the game number image 26q is displayed when timing T7 is reached, but for example, in the variation effect based on variation pattern 5 (miss, super reach 2), the game number image 26q may not be displayed when timing T7 is reached. In this case, the variation effect based on variation pattern 5 (miss, super reach 2) may be ended, and the image may be displayed when the execution of the variation effect based on the next variation pattern is started.
In addition, although it has been described that the hidden game number counter image 26p, game count image 26q, and reserved icon image are redisplayed at timing T7, these may be redisplayed at different times. For example, the reserved icon image may be redisplayed first, and the game count image 26q may be redisplayed later, or vice versa.

Next, using Figure 57, an example of game number display (variation pattern 10) will be explained.
57 shows an example of the updated display of the game number counter image 26p and the game number image 26q when variation pattern 10 is executed. Note that since the only difference between FIG. 57 and FIG. 56 is whether it is a win or a loss, the explanation will be omitted as appropriate.

The process from timing T1 to timing T5 is the same as in Figure 56. Then, when timing T5 is reached, the result of the special symbol win determination process is announced. In this example, variable pattern 10 corresponds to a win, so the result is announced by displaying an image such as "WIN" or by temporarily stopping each of the decorative symbol images 26a to 26c in a manner indicating a win ("555" in this example). Even when the result of the determination is announced, the number of plays counter image 26p and the number of games image 26q remain hidden.

Then, when timing T7 is reached and the display of the background switching image is finished, the decorative pattern images 26a-26c are temporarily displayed without displaying the number of plays counter image 26p, number of games image 26q, or hold icon image, and then various commands are received and the images are confirmed.

In other words, since the number of plays counter image 26p and the number of games image 26q are cleared when a winning game is won, there is no point in redisplaying them at that timing, and since the effects celebrating the winning game (rainbow-colored display and rainbow-colored light emission) attract more attention, they are not displayed from timing T7 to timing T9.
This makes it possible to realize the display (preferable display) of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q according to the situation.

In the case of a win, the background change from timing T6 to timing T7 may not be necessary. In other words, the display screen at timing T5 may be displayed without being changed, and the game may proceed to the win mode.

Note that in a variation effect based on variation pattern 10 (win, super reach 1), the game count image 26q is not displayed after timing T7. However, for example, in a variation effect based on variation pattern 11 (win, super reach 2), the game count image 26q may be displayed after timing T7. In this case, the image may be displayed from timing T7 and hidden at timing T9.

Next, using Figure 58, an example of game number display (variation pattern 6) will be explained.
Figure 58 is an example of the updated display of the number-of-games counter image 26p and the number-of-games image 26q when variation pattern 6 is executed.

First, at timing T1, the variation starts. At this time, both the game number counter image 26p and the game number image 26q are displayed, and for example, the game number counter image 26p displays "100 games remaining" at the bottom left of the display area, and the game number image 26q displays "798 games" at the top left of the display area.
In addition, each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c is displayed in a changing manner, and the changing icon is displayed in the changing icon display area 26o, and a hold icon is displayed in the first starting port first hold ball image display area 26g.

Then, as the variation time elapses and timing T2 is reached, a pseudo consecutive fanning is executed. The pseudo consecutive fanning is an effect in which a special symbol with the character "pseudo" for pseudo consecutive appears as the middle decorative symbol image 26b, and the special symbol is displayed as a temporary stop between the left decorative symbol image 26a and the right decorative symbol image 26c. If the special symbol is displayed as a temporary stop between the left decorative symbol image 26a and the right decorative symbol image 26c, the pseudo consecutive effect is executed, but if the special symbol is not displayed as a temporary stop, the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed.
Also, when the pseudo consecutive wins start, the game number counter image 26p continues to be displayed, but the game number image 26q is hidden.

Then, when the pseudo consecutive spins end and timing T3 is reached, the special symbol is temporarily displayed between the left decorative symbol image 26a and the right decorative symbol image 26c, causing a pseudo consecutive spin effect, and the second fluctuation in the pseudo consecutive spin effect begins at timing T4.

At timing T4, when the second variation in the pseudo consecutive effects begins, for example, "x2" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area to indicate that this is the second variation in the pseudo consecutive effects. Note that the game count image 26q remains hidden.

In other words, the pseudo consecutive effect is a single symbol change game, but it is an effect that makes it appear as if multiple changes are occurring, so if the game count image 26q, which is not updated, remains displayed, the merits of the pseudo consecutive effect may be lost. For example, no matter how many pseudo consecutive effects are executed, if you pay attention to the game count image 26q, it will be easy to notice that the currently executed change is a pseudo consecutive effect because it is not updated.
In response to this, by hiding the game number image 26q from timing T2 to timing T5, the risk of the benefits of the pseudo consecutive performance being lost can be eliminated.

In addition, when the game number counter image 26p is displayed, the game number counter image 26p may also be hidden.
Furthermore, the game number image 26q is hidden from timing T2 to timing T5, but it may be hidden from timing T2 to timing T4 and displayed from timing T4 to timing T5, or vice versa.
In particular, the game number image 26q may be kept displayed from the timing T2 to the timing T5, which can positively suggest that the pseudo consecutive effects are being performed.
The contents from timing T5 to timing T7 are generally the same as those explained in FIG. 55, so explanations thereof will be omitted.

Next, using Figure 59, we will explain an example (for comparison) of the display style for each game count display. The display style here refers to color, shape, size, font, the occurrence of separate notification effects, etc.

The display mode of the game number image 26q does not change when the number of games is "0" as shown in (a1), when the number of games is "100" as shown in (a2), or when the number of games is "500" as shown in (a3).
In other words, the display mode does not change depending on the number of milestones or the number of milestones as the number increases, and the device is positioned to play the same role as an external information display.

The display mode of the play count counter image 26p does not change between "100 plays left" when the display starts as shown in (b1) and "50 plays left" as shown in (b2). However, as shown in (b3), the display mode changes when it reaches "10 plays left." The change continues until it reaches "0 plays left." This makes it easier to prevent players from quitting play when it's "10 plays left," which can result in losses.

As shown in (c1), the remaining number of times image 26s does not change in display mode from "99 times remaining" when the display starts to "11 times remaining," but as shown in (c2), the display mode changes when it reaches "10 times remaining." In addition, a separate notification effect (countdown image 26t) is generated to emphasize that there are only a few times left in the time-saving game state. The change continues from there until it reaches "LAST," and a separate notification effect (countdown image 26t) is generated each time a change begins.

In this way, the display mode is executed according to the role of each game number display.
For example, if the display mode of the game count image 26q is changed after 500 games (a situation where no winning game has been won for a long time), it may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, it is preferable that the display mode of the game count image 26q not be changed regardless of the number of games played.
For example, if the display mode of the game count counter image 26p is not changed at "10 more plays," an inexperienced player may give up playing. Therefore, it is preferable to change the display mode at "10 more plays."
For example, if the display mode of "10 times remaining" in the remaining number of times image 26s is not changed, the time-saving game state will be consumed and ended in a monotonous manner, resulting in a gaming machine that is not interesting. Therefore, it is preferable to change the display mode with "10 times remaining" and generate a separate notification effect (countdown image 26t).

Next, an example of update display of the remaining number image 26s will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG.
Note that Figure 60 is an example of an update display when, for example, a special pattern is displayed variably on the second special pattern display device 27b in the time-shortened play state A, and Figure 61 is an example of an update display when, for example, a special pattern is displayed variably on the second special pattern display device 27b in the time-shortened play state A, and then an example of an update display when a special pattern is displayed variably on the first special pattern display device 27a.

As shown in Figure 60(a), the second special symbol display 27b variably displays the special symbol, and the image display device 26 variably displays the decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s displays "99 times remaining."

Then, as shown in Figure 60(b), once the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol display 27b confirms and displays the special symbol (displaying only the middle segment), and the image display device 26 confirms and displays each of the decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s displays "98 times remaining." The remaining number of times image 26s may be updated by receiving a special symbol confirmation command, or may be updated by preparing a dedicated command and receiving that dedicated command.

In Figure 60(c), the reserved icon displayed in the second starting port first reserved ball image display area 26k in Figure 60(b) shifts to the variable icon display area 26o, causing the second special pattern display 27b to display a variable special pattern, and causing the image display device 26 to display a variable decorative pattern image 26a-26c and the fourth pattern image 26d. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s displays "98 times remaining."

Then, as shown in Figure 60(d), once the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol display 27b confirms and displays the special symbol (displaying only the middle segment), and the image display device 26 confirms and displays each of the decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s displays "97 times remaining."

On the other hand, in Figure 61 (a), the second special pattern display 27b is displaying a changing special pattern, but the reserve icon is displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, and the reserve icon is not displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, or the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n. At this time, the remaining number of plays image 26s displays "90 plays remaining."

Then, as shown in Figure 61(b), once the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol display 27b confirms and displays the special symbol (displaying only the middle segment), and the image display device 26 confirms and displays each of the decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s displays "89 times remaining." Up to this point, the content is the same as that described in Figure 60.

In Figure 61(c), the reserved icon displayed in the first start slot first reserved ball image display area 26g in Figure 61(b) shifts to the variable icon display area 26o, causing the first special symbol display 27a to display a variable special symbol, and the image display device 26 to display a variable fourth symbol image 26d. Meanwhile, the decorative symbol images 26a-26c do not display a variable symbol, but instead display a temporary stop display with the symbol combination "612" confirmed and displayed in Figure 61(b) as is. In other words, if suboptimal play is performed in time-saving game state A (if a game ball enters the first start slot 21), the decorative symbol images 26a-26c do not display a variable symbol but display a temporary stop display (creating an unnatural feeling), and this unnatural feeling suggests that suboptimal play is being performed. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s displays "89 remaining times."

In addition, a right-hit suggestion image 26u is displayed in the center of the display area to encourage a right hit, and together with the temporary stop display described above, it suggests that suboptimal play is being performed. Note that the display of the right-hit suggestion image 26u continues until, for example, the gate detection switch 20a or the second starting gate detection switch 22a detects a game ball.

Then, as shown in Figure 61(d), once the variable time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 27a displays the confirmed special symbol (displaying only the middle segment), and the image display device 26 displays the confirmed decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. In other words, the "612" that was displayed as a temporary stop is displayed as a confirmed symbol. At this time, the remaining number of times image 26s shows "88 times remaining."

In other words, when updating and displaying the remaining number of times image 26s, if the second special symbol display 27b, which is the optimal game, displays a variable special symbol, the standard pattern change game is executed. However, if the first special symbol display 27a, which is the less optimal game, displays a variable special symbol, the pattern change game is executed in a special presentation mode different from the standard mode (the decorative symbol images 26a-26c are not displayed as variable symbols, but are temporarily stopped in place, and the right-hit suggestion image 26u is displayed). This makes it easier to understand whether the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b is responsible for updating and displaying the remaining number of times image 26s, even when updating and displaying the same remaining number of times image 26s, so the remaining number of times image 26s can be updated and displayed optimally. Furthermore, the difference in the execution mode of the pattern change game can encourage optimal gameplay.

Note that Figures 60 and 61 are explained as examples of time-saving game state A, but the same thing may also be done in time-saving game state B or a special game state.

Next, an example of the update display of the game number image 26q will be described with reference to Figures 62 and 63.
Note that Figure 62 is an example of an updated display when, for example, a special pattern is displayed variably on the first special pattern display device 27a in a normal game state, and Figure 63 is an example of an updated display when, for example, a special pattern is displayed variably on the second special pattern display device 27b in a normal game state.

As shown in Figure 62(a), the first special symbol display 27a variably displays the special symbol, and the image display device 26 variably displays the decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the game count image 26q displays "51 games."

Then, as shown in Figure 62(b), once the variable time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 27a displays the confirmed special symbol (displaying only the middle segment), and the image display device 26 displays the confirmed decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the game count image 26q displays "52 games."

In Figure 62(c), the reserved icon displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g in Figure 62(b) shifts to the variable icon display area 26o, causing the first special symbol display device 27a to variably display the special symbol, and causing the image display device 26 to variably display each of the decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the game count image 26q displays "52 games."

Then, as shown in Figure 62 (d), once the variable time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 27a displays the confirmed special symbol (displaying only the middle segment), and the image display device 26 displays the confirmed decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the game count image 26q displays "53 games."

63(a), the 100th symbol variation game in the time-saving gaming state A has ended, and an end effect has been executed. At this time, a reserve icon is displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m, and the second start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26n, and no reserve icon is displayed in the first start port first reserved ball image display area 26g, the first start port second reserved ball image display area 26h, the first start port third reserved ball image display area 26i, and the first start port fourth reserved ball image display area 26j.
It should be noted that at the time when the confirmation display is made in Figure 63 (a), the game state has transitioned from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state.

Then, when the end effect is executed for a predetermined time, a background image corresponding to the normal gaming state is displayed, along with an image that says "Return to left hand" to encourage the player to hit left. At this time, the image display device 26 also displays a game count image 26q. Note that since time-saving gaming state A has been executed, the game count image 26q displays "100 games."

In addition, the symbol change game corresponding to the reserved icon displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k begins. In other words, each decorative symbol image 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d are displayed in a changing state.

On the other hand, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area 26o, and no reserved icon is displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k, the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l, or the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m. In other words, when a special pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the second special pattern display 27b during normal game play, the variable icon display area 26o and each reserved ball image display area are displayed in an irregular manner (not displayed), suggesting that a special situation is occurring.

Then, as shown in Figure 63(c), once the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol display 27b confirms and displays the special symbol (displaying only the middle segment), and the image display device 26 confirms and displays each of the decorative symbol images 26a-26c and the fourth symbol image 26d. At this time, the game count image 26q displays "101 games."

Then, as shown in Figure 63 (d), the execution of the symbol change game corresponding to the reserved icon displayed in the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l is started.

In other words, when updating and displaying the number of games played image 26q, if the first special symbol display 27a is used to variably display a special symbol, a standard symbol variation game is executed; however, if the second special symbol display 27b is used to variably display a special symbol, a symbol variation game is executed in a special presentation mode (icons are not displayed) that differs from the standard mode. This makes it easier to determine whether the first special symbol display 27a or the second special symbol display 27b is responsible for updating and displaying the number of games played image 26q, even when updating and displaying the same number of games played image 26q, allowing the number of games played image 26q to be updated and displayed in an optimal manner.

Note that the event in which the special symbol changes and is displayed on the second special symbol display 27b during normal game play is not limited to when the game state transitions, but may also be caused by, for example, a ball accidentally entering the second starting hole 22 during normal game play.

In addition, while Figure 63 illustrates an example of transitioning from time-limited game state A to the normal game state, the same thing may also be done when transitioning from time-limited game state B to the normal game state. Furthermore, if a so-called ST type is adopted as the special probability game state, the same thing may also be done when transitioning from the special probability game state to the normal game state.

In addition, while Figure 63 shows that the variable icon display area 26o and each reserved ball image display area are in an irregular state (not displayed), this is not limited to this. For example, the reserved icon in each reserved ball image display area may be hidden, but the variable icon may be displayed in the variable icon display area 26o each time a pattern variable game is started.

In addition, while Figure 63 shows that the variable icon display area 26o and each reserved ball image display area are displayed in an irregular manner (not displayed), this is not limited to this. For example, the variable icon in the variable icon display area 26o and the reserved icon in each reserved ball image display area may be displayed in a different manner from the variable icon or reserved icon during the time-saving game mode. For example, in the time-saving game mode, the variable icon or reserved icon is displayed in yellow, but in the scene in Figure 63 it may be displayed in gray.

Next, using Figure 64, we will explain an example of the game number image 26q for each presentation stage.

As shown in (a1), in the river stage (corresponding to presentation mode A in Figure 7), for example, the variable icon and pending icon resembling a fish are displayed, and Arabic numerals are used for each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d.
On the other hand, as shown in (b1), in the castle stage (corresponding to presentation mode B in Figure 7), for example, the variable icon and pending icon resembling a scroll are displayed, and each decorative pattern image 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d use Chinese numerals.

In this way, the appearance of the variable icon, pending icon, decorative pattern images 26a to 26c, and fourth pattern image 26d differs for each presentation mode, but the display appearance (size, color, font, display position, etc.) of the game number image 26q remains unchanged and is displayed in the same manner regardless of the presentation mode.
This prevents the game number image 26q, which merely displays the number of games played, from standing out more than necessary.

It is also acceptable for the game number image 26q to be different for each presentation mode. For example, it may be displayed in Arabic numerals in presentation mode A and in Chinese numerals in presentation mode B.

Next, using Figures 65 to 67, we will explain an example of how the game count image 26q is updated.

As described above, the game number image 26q is updated and displayed when the performance control board 200 receives a game number display update command (command 21).
For example, as shown in FIG. 65, when a command (command 21) for updating the number of games played is received at timing T2, the number of games played image 26q is updated and displayed at timing T3, and the fluctuation stops (determined display).

FIG. 66 shows an irregular case where the game count display update command (command 21) is not received normally.
In other words, if the command for updating the number of games displayed (command 21) is not received correctly at timing T2, the confirmation display will be made at timing T3, but the number of games displayed image 26q will not be updated and will remain as "50 games" as displayed at timing T1.

Then, when a special symbol change pattern designation command (e.g., command 15) is received at timing T4, the symbol change game begins at timing T5, and the game count image 26q is updated to show "51 games." Although not shown, if a game count display update command (command 21) is successfully received in the symbol change game that began at timing T5, the game count image 26q will show "52 games." In other words, the game count image 26q will be updated twice in one symbol change game.

In this way, if the game count display update command (command 21) is not received correctly, the game count image 26q is updated using the command sent at the start of the next symbol change game. This minimizes the non-update period from the time the game is stopped until the start of the next symbol change game, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable.

Figure 67 shows a modified version of Figure 66, and is similar to Figure 66 in that the command for updating the number of games played (command 21) was not received correctly at timing T2, but differs from Figure 66 in that the number of games played image 26q is not updated even when the command for specifying a special symbol variation pattern (e.g., command 15) is received correctly at timing T4.

In this case, at timing T6, the game count display update command (command 21) for the next symbol change game is successfully received, so the display updates for both games at once. That is, when the symbol change game starts at timing T1, "50 games" is displayed, and when the symbol change game starts at timing T5, "50 games" is also displayed, but when the change stops at timing T7, "52 games" is displayed.

In this way, if the game count display update command (command 21) cannot be received correctly, the game count image 26q is updated using the game count display update command (command 21) sent when the next symbol change game stops. This simplifies the control process by allowing a single process of receiving the game count display update command (command 21) and updating the game count image 26q.

The above-described embodiment is merely an example and can be modified as appropriate.
For example, the remaining number of times image 26s and the number of games image 26q are updated and displayed based on a command received when the pattern change game stops, but they may also be updated and displayed based on a command received when the pattern change game starts.

For example, the game count image 26q is displayed on the image display device 26 when in the normal game state, but is not displayed when in the time-saving game state A, B, or the probability variable game state. However, the game count image 26q may also be displayed on the image display device 26 when in the time-saving game state A, B, or the probability variable game state.

For example, while the image display device 26 is configured to display the game count image 26q, other information displayed on the external information display device may also be displayed on the image display device 26. Specifically, the number of winning games and the number of times a game has transitioned to a special game state may be displayed.

For example, the display of the game count image 26q may be hidden regardless of the player's wishes, but it may also be possible to hide it at the player's discretion. For example, it may be possible to hide it at any time by operating the effect button 14. This makes it possible to meet the needs of a variety of players.

For example, the decorative part 2a may not perform any special effects, but may instead perform effects. Specifically, effects may be performed by lighting up or by moving. Furthermore, effects by lighting up or by moving may be positioned as advance notice effects that suggest the possibility of a winning game being awarded, or may simply be positioned as effects that are performed during a winning game.

Furthermore, when a light-emitting effect (announcement effect) is executed, the decorative part 2a stands out due to the light emission, while the external information display may become even more difficult to see. Therefore, the game count image 26q may be displayed while a light-emitting effect (announcement effect) is being executed.

For example, the game count image 26q may be displayed while waiting for customers, while a demo effect is being played, or both. This makes it easier for players about to play to understand the current number of times the symbol change game has been played, improving convenience.

Next, we will explain the "limit function" in more detail using Figures 68 to 79.

Figures 68 (a1) and (a2) show the notification modes of various notification means when the limit function is activated during a winning game, and (b1) and (b2) show the notification modes of various notification means when the limit function is activated during a special probability game state (notification that game progress has been restricted).

(a1) assumes that the third round of a winning game is being played. For example, the image display device 26 displays a round image rg indicating the current round number, a right-hit image mg, a second start port reserved number image 26f indicating that there are "2" reserved balls, and the speaker 10 outputs background music corresponding to the winning game along with the display of a predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game.

Also, for example, in the second special symbol display 27b, the segment corresponding to the special symbol E is lit in a form representing "7." On the other hand, the first special symbol display 27a is turned off.
In addition, the right-hit indicator 29c is lit (shown as a solid color), and the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 are emitting rainbow colors.

For example, the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c is off (indicating that there is no reserved memory), the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d is on (indicating that memory has been stored up to the second memory area), the normal symbol indicator 27e is fluctuating, the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f is on (indicating that memory has been stored up to the second memory area), and the round indicator 27g has the LED for 5 rounds off and the LED for 10 rounds on (indicating that 10 rounds of winning play are being played). Note that off is indicated by no fill, on is indicated by a fill, and fluctuating is indicated by a diagonal line.

Then, during the third round of play, the player allegedly landed a game ball in the big prize slot 24 (or regular prize slot 23), causing the difference in the number of balls to exceed "95,000" and reaching the limit.
In this case, the large prize opening 24 is closed even if the end condition of the third round (10 game balls entering the large prize opening 24 or 29.5 seconds of opening time) is not met.

Then, as shown in (a2), the display of the predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game ends, and a message image msg3 saying "The limit function has been activated. Please stop playing," a warning image cau1 saying "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!", and a warning image cau2 saying "Be careful not to get addicted!" are displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds). These displays are, for example, displayed with white text on a black background, but any color scheme can be used as long as the text stands out. The card corresponds to the valuable medium mentioned above (prepaid card, membership card).

In addition, the output of background music corresponding to a winning game is stopped, and an alarm sound such as "beep beep" or a voice corresponding to the message image msg3 is output from the speaker 10.
In addition, all segments of the first special pattern display 27a and the second special pattern pending display 27d light up, the right-hit display 29c turns off, and the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 flash in red.
In addition, the LEDs of the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c, the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d, the normal symbol indicator 27e, the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f, and the round indicator 27g are all lit up.

Note that alarm sounds such as "beep beep" and the sound corresponding to the message image msg3 will be output at maximum volume, regardless of the volume value that can be set by the player.

(b1) shows a symbol change game in the probability variable game state, and the image display device 26 displays the change of each decorative symbol image 26a-26c, the change of the fourth symbol image 26d, the RUSH image kg indicating that the game is in the probability variable game state, the right-hit image mg, the second start port reserved ball number image 26f indicating that there is "2" reserved balls, and reserved icons displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k and the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l. A predetermined background image corresponding to the probability variable game state is displayed, and background music corresponding to the probability variable game state is output from the speaker 10.

Also, for example, the second special symbol display 27b is fluctuating, and the first special symbol display 27a is off.
In addition, the right-hit indicator 29c is lit, and the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 are emitting blue and white light.

In addition, for example, the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c is off (indicating that there is no reserved memory), for example, the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d is on (indicating that memory has been stored up to the second memory area), for example, the normal symbol indicator 27e is fluctuating, the normal symbol reserved indicator 27f is on (indicating that memory has been stored up to the second memory area), and the round indicator 27g is off.

Then, by inserting the game ball into the second starting hole 22 (or the normal winning hole 23), the difference in the number of balls becomes "95,000" or more, and the limit is reached.
In this case, the pattern variation game is ended even if the conditions for ending the pattern variation game are not met (even before the final display).
In addition, the second starting port 22 is closed even if the opening/closing termination condition (1.8 seconds x 3 times) is not met. For example, if the first opening is in progress, the opening is terminated and the subsequent second opening for 1.8 seconds and the third opening for 1.8 seconds are not performed.
This results in the configuration shown in (b2). The configuration shown in (b2) is similar to (a2), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

In this way, if the difference in the number of balls becomes "95,000" or more, if a winning game is in progress, the winning game is immediately ended, and if a symbol change game is in progress, the symbol change game is immediately ended, and the notification shown in (a2) and (b2) is made. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit function has been activated in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, in (a2), the notification is made by not displaying (not being able to be seen at all) the predetermined background image corresponding to the winning game displayed in (a1), and in (b2), the notification is made by not displaying (not being able to be seen at all) the predetermined background image corresponding to the probability variable game state displayed in (b1). This allows the player to recognize that the limit function has been activated in (a2) and (b2) without being discouraged.
For example, if a part of a predetermined background image corresponding to a winning game can be seen in (a2), or if a part of a pattern variation game can be seen in (b2), the player may be disappointed, but this can be prevented.

In addition, in (a2) and (b2), not only are notifications sent by the image display device 26 and speaker 10, but each display device managed by the main control board 100 also notifies that the limit function has been activated. As a result, if the wiring connecting the main control board 100 and the performance control board 200 is damaged, or if a connector is damaged or partially inserted, and commands cannot be sent from the main control board 100 to the performance control board 200, notifications cannot be sent by the image display device 26 or speaker 10, but notifications can still be sent by each display device managed by the main control board 100, preventing confusion among players.

In addition, in (a2) and (b2), in addition to notifying the player that the limit function has been activated, a warning image cau1 such as "Don't forget to remove your card!" and a warning image cau2 such as "Don't get addicted!" are displayed. This helps prevent players from forgetting to remove valuable media when they are playing while the valuable media is still inserted in the insertion slot of the game ball lending device. Also, when the limit function is activated, it is expected that the player will have acquired many game balls, and such players can be encouraged to avoid excessive playing the next time they play.

In addition, in (a2) and (b2), the warning sound such as "beep beep" and the sound corresponding to the message image msg3 are output at maximum volume, regardless of the volume value that can be set by the player, so that the administrator can quickly recognize that the limit function has been activated.

The notification modes of (a2) and (b2) can be changed as appropriate. For example, they may flash instead of lighting up. Furthermore, notifications on each display device managed by the main control board 100 may be made using only some of the display devices rather than all of the display devices. For example, only the first special symbol reserved indicator 27c may be used, only the second special symbol reserved indicator 27d may be used, only the first special symbol indicator 27a may be used, or only the second special symbol indicator 27b may be used.

Although the description has been given assuming that a sound corresponding to the attention-calling image cau1 such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" is not output, a corresponding sound may be output. For example, a sound such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" may be output after a sound such as "The limit function has been activated. Please stop playing." This can further prevent players from forgetting to take their valuable medium.
On the other hand, it is not necessary to output a sound corresponding to the warning image cau2 such as "Watch out for getting addicted!" This prevents the player from being warned more than necessary and feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, when the limit function is activated, it is possible to check whether a valuable medium has been inserted into the insertion slot of the game ball lending device, and if it has been inserted, to display a warning image cau1 such as "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!", and if it has not been inserted, to not display the warning image cau1 such as "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!". This can prevent unnecessary warnings from being issued.

"Be careful not to forget to pick up your card!" is a warning message that is executed at the end of a winning game when a win occurs in normal game mode (see Figure 73), but is not executed at the end of a winning game when a win occurs in time-limited game mode or special game mode (it is executed only at the time of the first win).
"Caution: Don't get addicted!" is a warning message that is executed at the end of a winning game when a win occurs in a normal game state (see FIG. 73), but is not executed at the end of a winning game when a win occurs in a time-saving game state or a probability variable game state (it is executed only at the first win). It is also a warning message that is executed during a demo (see FIG. 73).

The "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" message that is executed when the limit function is activated may be the same as or different from the warning message that is executed at the end of a winning game. For example, the warning message may be stronger when the limit function is activated. For example, as described above, the "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" message that is executed when the limit function is activated may be accompanied by audio output, but the "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" message that is executed at the end of a winning game may not be accompanied by audio output. Also, at the end of a winning game, the message disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed, but when the limit function is activated, the message may not disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed, or the warning message may continue (the display may continue and the audio may continue to be output) until the valuable medium is returned. This allows appropriate warnings to be issued according to the situation.
It should be noted that the warning "Be careful not to get carried away!" may also be given in a manner appropriate to the situation.

Although (b1) and (b2) have been described as cases where the limit function is activated in a probability variable game state, they may also be interpreted as cases where the limit function is activated in a time-saving game state. Also, although the description has been given as cases where the limit function is activated during a symbol variable game, it may also be during a waiting for customers or during a demo performance.
Furthermore, if the limit function is activated when a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 while waiting for customers or during a demo performance, the system may not execute the symbol variation game corresponding to the ball, and may notify the player that the limit function has been activated. This prevents the limit function from being activated as soon as the symbol variation game begins to be executed, which would disappoint the player.

In addition, in (a2), a predetermined background image corresponding to a winning game may be partially visible, and in (b2), a predetermined background image corresponding to a probability variable game state may be partially visible. This makes it possible to determine from the partially visible background image whether the scene in which the limit function was activated was during a winning game or a probability variable game state, which can, for example, increase convenience for an administrator when compiling scenes in which the limit function was activated.

Figure 69 is a diagram explaining the notification mode when the time-saving game state (time-saving game state A) ends and the game transitions to the normal game state, and the notification mode when the limit function is activated in the time-saving game state.
In addition, if the so-called ST probability change (for example, if no winning game is won in 100 pattern change games, the probability change game state ends), the time-saving game state may be interpreted as the probability change game state.

(a1) shows the final symbol change game in the time-saving game mode. The image display device 26 displays the changes of the decorative symbol images 26a-26c, the change of the fourth symbol image 26d, an image such as "Time-saving LAST" indicating that this is the final symbol change game in the time-saving game mode, the right-hit image mg, the second start port reserved ball number image 26f indicating that there are "2" reserved balls, and reserved icons displayed in the second start port first reserved ball image display area 26k and the second start port second reserved ball image display area 26l. A predetermined background image corresponding to the time-saving game mode is displayed, and background music corresponding to the time-saving game mode is output from the speaker 10. The right-hit indicator 29c is also lit (indicated by a solid color).

(a2) is a continuation of (a1) and shows the ending screen of the time-saving game mode. Each decorative pattern image 26a-26c is difficult to see, but the fourth pattern image 26d is displayed as "345", the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 26o is hidden, the right-hit image mg is hidden, and the right-hit indicator 29c is turned off. In addition, background music corresponding to the ending of the time-saving game mode is output.

(a3) is a continuation of (a2) and shows a scene when the game is transitioning to the normal game mode. When the game is transitioned to the normal game mode, a message image msg5 such as "Return to left-handed play!" is displayed in the center of the display area, suggesting that it is best to play left-handed, and a sound corresponding to "Return to left-handed play!" and background music corresponding to the normal game mode are output from the speaker 10.
In this way, when the time-saving game state ends under the first ending condition (execution of a specified number of pattern change games), a notification such as "Return to left-handed play!" will be made, suggesting that it is best to play left-handed.

(b1) differs from (a1) only in the number of remaining plays in the time-saving game state (e.g., 50 remaining), and is otherwise identical, so explanation will be omitted.

Then, by inserting the game ball into the second starting hole 22 (or the normal winning hole 23), the difference in the number of balls becomes "95,000" or more, and the limit is reached.
In this case, the pattern variation game is ended even if the conditions for ending the pattern variation game are not met (even before the final display).
In addition, the second starting port 22 is closed even if the opening/closing termination condition (1.8 seconds x 3 times) is not met. For example, if the first opening is in progress, the opening is terminated and the subsequent second opening for 1.8 seconds and the third opening for 1.8 seconds are not performed.
This results in the state shown in (b2). The state shown in (b2) is similar to (a2) and (b2) in Figure 68, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

(b3) shows the notification mode of the image display device 26 after a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since (b2). When a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since (b2), the alarm sound and audio output from the speaker 10 stop, and the image display device 26 displays a message image msg4 stating, "Limit function activated. Game stopped." In this way, when a predetermined time has passed since the state in (b2), the alarm sound and audio stop, and the content of the message image also changes (the notification mode is changed). This prevents the alarm sound and audio from being output indefinitely, which could cause discomfort to nearby players.

Note that although the notification mode (b3) is changed after a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since (b2), the notification mode (b2) may continue until, for example, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. This can prompt the administrator to take prompt action.

In addition, the message image msg3 such as "The limit function has been activated. Please stop playing" and the warning image cau2 such as "Be careful not to get addicted!" will cease to be displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, but the warning image cau1 such as "Be careful not to forget to take your card!" may continue to be displayed until the card (valuable medium) is returned from the game ball lending device. This more effectively prevents players from forgetting to take the card (valuable medium).

In this way, when the time-saving game state ends due to the second ending condition (activation of the limit function), rather than issuing a notification such as "Return to left-handed play!" which suggests that left-handed play is optimal, the system prioritizes an announcement that the limit function has been activated. This allows for accurate notifications according to the situation, and allows the player to quickly receive the information they want to convey.

When the time-saving game state ends due to the second ending condition (activation of the limit function), no direct notification such as "Return to left-hand play!" is given, but since the right-hand play indicator 29c is turned off in (b2), it can be said that an indirect notification is given to stop "right-hand play."

FIG. 70 shows an example in which the limit function is activated during a winning game.
First, as shown in (a1) to (a3), the first mode is a mode in which, when the current difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000, the winning game is ended even if it is in the middle of a winning game, and the limit function is forcibly activated. Let us assume that the winning game is reached with the special symbol E.

(a1) shows the opening of a winning game, with the current difference in the number of balls being 94,700. During this opening, a message image msg6 is displayed stating, "Caution: Game will be stopped after a win." Additionally, a sound corresponding to this message image msg6 is output from the speaker 10. This notifies the player in advance that the limit function will be activated.

Then, in the third round of the winning game, the difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000, and the limit function is activated. In this case, the winning game ends, and (a2) and (a3) become the notification modes described in Figure 69 (b2) and (b3). In this way, even if the winning game is in the middle of playing, if the difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000, the winning game ends and the limit function is activated, so that the difference in the number of balls that activates the limit function can be strictly observed.

Next, the second mode, as shown in (b1) and (b2), is a mode in which the winning game continues to the end even if the current difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000, and the limit function is activated after the winning game ends. Let's assume that the winning game is reached with special symbol E.

(b1) is the same situation and notification mode as (a1), so explanation is omitted. After that, in the third round of the winning game, the difference in the number of balls is assumed to be 95,000, but as shown in (b2), the game continues until the 10th round (final round), and the current difference in the number of balls is 95,700. When the 10th round (final round) is over, the same mode as (a2) and (a3) is achieved. In this way, even if the difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000 during the winning game, the winning game is not terminated but continues to the end, and the limit function is then activated, allowing the winning game to be enjoyed to the end and giving the player a sense of having made a profit.

In this way, the first and second modes are conceivable as ways to deal with the situation when the difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000 during a winning game, but either one or both may be provided.

In addition, in the first mode, a special round effect may be executed from the first round to the third round. The special round effect is executed only when the difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000 during the winning game and the limit function is activated. This gives the player a sense of accomplishment and is expected to further increase their interest in the game.

In addition, in the second aspect, a special ending effect may be executed after completing 10 rounds (final round) in (b2). The special ending effect is executed only when the difference in the number of balls reaches 95,000 during a winning game and the limit function is activated. The limit function can then be activated after the special ending effect is executed. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and further increase their interest in the game.

In addition, in the second mode, both a special round effect and a special ending effect may be executed. This can give players a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction, further increasing their interest in the game.

Note that Figure 70 describes an example in which the limit function is activated during a winning game. In other words, an example in which the limit function is activated during a game that is activated when a win is determined in the special symbol win determination process of Figure 21 has been described, but this is not limited to this. If a small win game is also included, the limit function may be activated during execution of the small win game. A small win game is a game that is activated when a small win lottery is held when a loss is determined in the special symbol win determination process of Figure 21, and the small win lottery is won, in which case the large prize opening 24 opens a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). The limit function may also be activated during a so-called small win rush, in which it becomes easier to win consecutive small win games.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing various operational modes when the limit function is activated.
68(a2), the explanation of the notification mode of (a2) is omitted because it is the same notification mode. In the case of (a2), the payout of prize balls is "allowed", the payout of balls is "not allowed", the insertion of a card (valuable medium) into the insertion slot of the game ball lending device is "not allowed", the return of the card (valuable medium) from the game ball lending device is "allowed", the adjustment of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key button 16 is "not allowed", and the launching of a menu using the effect button 14 is "not allowed".

In other words, in scene (a2), in both the first and second modes of FIG. 70, it is assumed that the payout of prize balls for a game ball entering the large prize opening 24 has not been completed. Therefore, by setting the payout of prize balls to "allowed," it is possible to prevent a player from becoming disappointed when a game ball enters the large prize opening 24 during a winning game but the corresponding prize ball is not paid out.

On the other hand, ball rental and payout are "not allowed." This prevents players who sit down without realizing that the limit function has been activated from feeling uncomfortable because they are unable to play even though they have been loaned game balls.

In addition, the insertion of a card is set to "not permitted." This allows the player to know that playing is not possible at the stage before the ball rental and payout step described above.
In addition, the card can be returned as "possible." This prevents the inconvenience of not being able to return the card (valuable medium) after the limit function is activated.

In addition, volume and light intensity adjustment is set to "not possible." This prevents the volume value from being adjusted too low, making it difficult for the administrator to hear the alarm sound or voice output in (a2).
In addition, the menu cannot be launched. This prevents the display screen (a2) from terminating and the menu screen from launching, ensuring the display screen (a2).

(a3) is the same scene as (a3) in Figure 70, but if the payout of prize balls has not been completed in that scene, a message image msg8 such as "Payout in progress" is displayed. This notifies the player or administrator that the payout has not been completed, preventing the player from quitting the game without receiving the prize balls.

In addition, in this scene, the light-emitting device 9 flashes white, and the board lighting device 29 flashes white. In other words, when switching from (a2) to (a3), the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 changes. More specifically, they switch from a flashy notification such as a flashing red light to a more subdued notification such as a flashing white light. This prevents the red flashing (flashy notification) from continuing indefinitely, resulting in more notification than necessary.

In the case of (a3), prize ball payout is "allowed," ball rental payout is "not allowed," insertion of a card (valuable medium) into the insertion slot of the game ball rental device is "not allowed," return of the card (valuable medium) from the game ball rental device is "allowed," adjustment of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key button 16 is "not allowed," and launching a menu using the effect button 14 is "not allowed." This achieves the same effect as described in (a2).

(a4) is the state in which the payout of prize balls has been completed. In this scene, the message image msg8 such as "Payout in progress" is hidden, and the light-emitting device 9 and board lighting device 29 are turned off. This allows the change in the light emission pattern to also indicate that the payout of prize balls has been completed. Note that if the payout of prize balls has been completed in (a2), simply switch from (a2) to (a4).

In the case of (a4), prize ball payout is "not allowed," ball rental payout is "not allowed," insertion of a card (valuable medium) into the insertion slot of the game ball rental device is "not allowed," return of the card (valuable medium) from the game ball rental device is "allowed," adjustment of the volume and light intensity values using the cross key buttons 16 is "not allowed," and launching a menu using the effect button 14 is "not allowed." This prevents sudden payout of prize balls even when play is stopped (by disabling prize ball payout), for example, if a game ball is parked on the game board and accidentally enters one of the various winning slots. Other configurations have the same effects as those described in (a2).

In (a3), a message image msg8 saying "Payout in progress" is displayed, but the actual number of prize balls to be paid out may also be displayed. For example, if there are 200 prize balls to be paid out, "200" may be displayed, and the number may be subtracted each time a prize ball is paid out. This makes it easier to see how much time is left until the prize balls are paid out, thereby improving convenience.

Furthermore, since the menu cannot be launched after the scene (a2), for example, a gaming machine that launches a menu and allows a game to be played in conjunction with a communication device (smartphone) carried by the player may experience the inconvenience of being unable to record the game. Therefore, a two-dimensional code may be displayed on the image display device 26 at the scene (a2). This can eliminate the above-mentioned inconvenience.
In addition, a game linked to a communication device (smartphone) is a game (system) in which, for example, the effects performed on the pachinko game machine 1 are recorded, the recorded results are displayed as a two-dimensional code, and the player imports the two-dimensional code via the communication device, and the game is recorded on a server.

Figure 72 is a diagram explaining the notification mode when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, where (a1) and (a2) show the notification mode when the power is turned on after the limit function is activated, and (b1) and (b2) show the notification mode when the power is turned on when the limit function is not activated.

(a1) shows the state when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, for example, in the state shown in Figure 69 (b3) or Figure 70 (a3), and indicates the time when the power is about to be turned on. In other words, the image display device 26 is in a power-off state (not displayed).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then turned on, a message such as "Power ON" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, followed by the screen shown in (a2). In (a2), a message image msg1 (e.g., white text on a black background) is displayed, stating "Limit function active. Please clear RAM."

Furthermore, the speaker 10 outputs a warning sound such as "beep beep" and a sound corresponding to the message image msg1 in a loop.
In addition, the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 flash red.

In this way, if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch 105 after the limit function has been activated, a notification is issued urging the user to initialize the main RAM 103. This makes it easier to understand the procedure for changing from a stopped state to a playable state, preventing confusion in the gaming parlor.
In addition, if the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 105 in the (a1) state, the notification mode as in (a2) will not be performed, and a notification regarding the initialization of the main RAM 103 will be performed.

(b1) shows the state in which the limit function is not activated, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the time has come to turn the power on (only turning the power on). In other words, the image display device 26 is in the power-off state (not displayed).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then turned on, a message such as "Power ON" is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the screen shown in (b2) is displayed. In (b2), a message image msg2 such as "The limit management counter has been cleared" is displayed (for example, in white text on a black background).

Furthermore, the speaker 10 outputs a sound corresponding to the message image msg2 a predetermined number of times.
In addition, the light emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 are lit in blue.
Then, at a predetermined timing, "initial operations" such as checking the operation of the movable body 28 and checking the vibration operation of the effect button 14 are started.

In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on when the limit function is not activated, a notification is sent that the limit management counter has been cleared. This allows the user to be sure that the limit management counter has been cleared, improving convenience.

The audio and alarm sound corresponding to message image msg1 are output in a loop until main RAM 103 is initialized, but the audio corresponding to message image msg2 may be output once or multiple times (for example, three times). This allows for appropriate notification depending on the level of importance of the notification.

Note that (a2) does not mention "initial operation," but like (b2), "initial operation" may be started at a predetermined timing, or unlike (b2), "initial operation" may not be started at a predetermined timing.
This simplifies the control process because, when performing "initial operation," it is not necessary to perform the "initial operation" because the main RAM 103 has not been initialized, and the "initial operation" can be performed uniformly when the power is turned on. Also, at the very least, the operation of the movable body 28 and the vibration operation of the effect button 14 can be confirmed in the (a2) stage, which reduces the number of items to be confirmed when the power is turned on thereafter, thereby improving convenience.
On the other hand, if the "initial operation" is not performed, it is possible to prevent the operation of the movable body 28 from making it difficult to see the message image msg1, or to prevent the player from having difficulty understanding the procedure for changing from a stopped game to a playable state.

The notification shown in (b2) is not limited to when the power is turned on, but may also be executed when a setting change process is performed, a setting confirmation process is performed, or the main RAM 103 is initialized. This allows the user to recognize that the limit management counter has been reliably cleared, regardless of the process being performed, thereby improving convenience.
On the other hand, when a setting change process is performed or when the main RAM 103 is initialized (both of which involve initialization of the main RAM 103), the notification shown in (b2) may not be made, and when only the power is turned on or when a setting confirmation process is performed (both of which involve initialization of the main RAM 103), the notification shown in (b2) may be made. This allows the notification to be made only when initialization of the main RAM 103 is not involved, making it possible to make appropriate notifications as needed.

Figure 73 is a diagram illustrating a notification method for notifying a player that a limit function is installed. If a player plays without knowing that a limit function is installed and the limit function is activated, causing play to stop, this could cause trouble between the player and the gaming parlor. Therefore, it is necessary to notify the player that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a limit function in various situations.

(a1) to (a3) show the endings (winning game endings) at the first winning time described above. (a1) shows the 10th round (final round) of the winning game, with background music (BGM1) being output from the speaker 10 during the round. Furthermore, the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit rainbow light.

Then, when the 10th round (final round) ends, the winning game ending shown in (a2) is executed. In (a2), the ending background music (BGM2) is output, and the image display device 26 displays "Winning game ends! One more time" (a display indicating that the winning game has ended and the game will transition to a special probability game state). In addition, the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit blue light.

After displaying (a2) for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), display of (a2) ends and display of (a3) continues as the ending. In (a3), as with (a1) and (a2), the right-hit image mg is displayed, along with the first start slot reserved number image 26e, the second start slot reserved number image 26f, and the warning image cau1 saying "Be careful not to forget to remove your card!", the warning image cau2 saying "Be careful not to get addicted!", and the warning image cau3 saying "Limit function included" are displayed. In addition, sound effects indicating the display of each warning image are output from the speaker 10. In addition, the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit white light.

In this way, the warning image cau3 is displayed at the ending of the first win (winning game ending). This makes it easier for players to recognize that the machine is equipped with a limit function.

In addition, in scene (a3), BGM1 output in scene (a1) and BGM2 output in scene (a2) are stopped, and sound effects different from these BGMs are output, making it easier for the user to recognize that each warning image has been displayed.
It should be noted that the same effect can be obtained by outputting BGM3 instead of sound effects.

In addition, the light emission mode in scene (a1), scene (a2), and scene (a3) are all different. In particular, scene (a1) uses a flashy light emission mode such as rainbow light emission, while scene (a3) uses a more subdued light emission mode such as white light emission. This prevents the light emission mode in scene (a3) from standing out too much and making it difficult for the player to see the warning images.

In (a3), attention alert images cau1 to cau3 are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one, or attention alert images cau1 and cau2 may be displayed and then hidden, with only attention alert image cau3 displayed. This makes it easier for users to recognize that the limit function is installed.

Furthermore, when the attention alert image cau3 is displayed alone, an audio output corresponding to the attention alert image cau3 may be provided. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that the device is equipped with a limit function.

Also, the warning images cau1 and cau2 may be displayed only on the first win, while the warning image cau3 may be displayed every time a winning game ends, not just on the first win. This makes it easier for users to recognize that the machine is equipped with a limit function.

Furthermore, if a winning game is achieved with special pattern C or special pattern F, the warning image cau3 may not be displayed at the winning game ending. In other words, since special pattern C and special pattern F are special patterns that transition to a time-limited game state rather than a probability variable game state after the winning game ends, the continuity of winning games is lower than when transitioning to a probability variable game state. Therefore, by not displaying warning image cau3 at winning game endings corresponding to such special patterns, it is possible to prevent unnecessary notifications (notifications that players find annoying).

(b1) to (b3) show the demo in progress. (b1) shows the first period during the demo, during which the image display device 26 displays a display such as "○△ Co., Ltd." indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a first start slot reserved number image 26e, a second start slot reserved number image 26f, and a fourth symbol image 26d indicating a loss. In addition, the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit blue light. Note that, since the demo is in progress, background music and sound effects are not output during (b1) to (b3).

(b2) shows the second period during the demo, during which the image display device 26 displays the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as "Pachinko XX," as well as an image 26e of the number of reserved balls in the first starting slot, an image 26f of the number of reserved balls in the second starting slot, and a fourth symbol image 26d indicating a loss. In addition, the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit rainbow light to enhance the display of the model name.

(b3) shows the third period during the demo, during which the image display device 26 displays the number of reserved balls at the first starting port 26e, the number of reserved balls at the second starting port 26f, and the fourth symbol image 26d indicating a miss, as well as the warning image cau2 saying "Beware of addiction!", the warning image cau3 saying "Limit function installed!", the warning image cau4 saying "Beware of strategy fraud!", and the warning image cau5 saying "No hitting the machine." In addition, the light-emitting device 9 and the board lighting device 29 emit white light.

In this way, the warning image cau3 is displayed during the demonstration. This makes it easier for users to recognize that the device is equipped with a limit function.

Furthermore, the light-emitting modes in scenes (b1), (b2), and (b3) are all different. In particular, a flashy light-emitting mode such as rainbow light is used in scene (b2), while a more subdued light-emitting mode such as white light is used in scene (b3). This prevents the light-emitting mode in scene (b3) from being too prominent and obscuring the attention-calling images from being noticed by the player.
Furthermore, even during a demonstration in which background music is not output, the light emission pattern changes significantly from (b2) to (b3), making it easier to recognize that each warning image has been displayed.

In addition, the lighting pattern is the same for scenes (a3) and (b3). This ensures that each warning image is displayed in the same lighting pattern regardless of the scene, preventing the warning image from becoming difficult to see due to different lighting patterns depending on the scene.

Note that (b1) to (b3) have been explained using an example of a demo in normal game mode, but notifications similar to (b1) to (b3) may also be made during a demo in time-limited game mode or during a demo in probability variable game mode. In such cases, the difference is that the right-hit image mg is displayed on the image display device 26, but the other display content may be the same as (b1) to (b3). This allows the attention drawing image cau3 to be displayed during a demo regardless of the game mode, making it easier to recognize that a limit function is installed.

In (b3), attention alert images cau2 to cau5 are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one, or attention alert images cau2, 4, and 5 may be displayed and then hidden, with only attention alert image cau3 displayed. This makes it easier for users to recognize that the limit function is installed.

Furthermore, when the attention alert image cau3 is displayed alone, an audio output corresponding to the attention alert image cau3 may be provided. This makes it easier for the user to recognize that the device is equipped with a limit function.

Figure 74 explains the notification mode used to notify the player that the machine is equipped with a limit function. Figure 73 explains how notifications are given at the end of a winning game and during a demo, but Figure 74 explains how notifications are given while waiting for customers.

(a1) is the same as the scene in Figure 73 (b1) during the demo. It is assumed that while (a1) is displayed, the player sits down, grasps the launch handle 8, and turns on the handle touch sensor.

When the handle touch sensor is turned ON, the screen switches to the waiting screen shown in (a2). When the screen switches to the waiting screen, a sound effect such as "Welcome" is output from the speaker 10, and background music corresponding to the "XX stage" is played. In addition, each decorative pattern image 26a-26c, the "XX stage" indicating the current performance stage, and the variable icon display area 26o are displayed.

In addition, a strip-shaped attention-calling image cau6 saying "Limit function installed" is displayed at the top left and bottom right of the display area. The strip-shaped attention-calling image cau6 is configured with, for example, yellow letters on a black background, or vice versa, so that it is easy for the player to notice.
Thereafter, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 21, the icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 26o as shown in (a3), the decorative pattern images 26a to 26c and the fourth pattern image 26d start to display in a variable manner, and the warning image cau6 is no longer displayed.
In Figure 74, the warning image cau6 is displayed when the launch handle 8 is gripped during the demonstration and the screen switches to the customer waiting screen, but the warning image cau6 may be displayed while waiting for customers.

In this way, the warning image cau6 is displayed while waiting for customers, making it easier for users to recognize that the machine is equipped with a limit function. Furthermore, if the launch handle 8 is gripped during the demonstration, the demo mode is not continued, but the screen returns to the waiting screen, displaying the strip-shaped warning image cau6, making it even easier for users to recognize that the machine is equipped with a limit function.

In addition, by quickly hiding the warning image cau6 when a starting win occurs, it is possible to prevent the pattern change game from becoming difficult to see and to prevent it from causing annoyance to the player.

The warning image cau6 may also dynamically display the words "Equipped with limit function." This creates a greater visual change, making it easier for users to recognize that the device is equipped with a limit function.

Figure 75 is a diagram explaining the notification mode for notifying the player that the limit function is installed, with (a1) to (a3) being the same as (a1) to (a3) in Figure 74. On the other hand, (b1) and (b2) show the case where the firing handle 8 is gripped with the limit function activated and the handle touch sensor is turned ON.

(b1) is the same scene as Figures 69(b3) and 70(a3), and shows a message image msg4 saying "The limit function has been activated. Play has been stopped." Even if the launch handle 8 is gripped and the handle touch sensor is turned ON while this message is displayed, (b2) does not switch to the display shown in Figure 75(a2), and the display shown in (b1) is maintained. In other words, when the limit function is activated, the warning image cau6 is not displayed even if the handle touch sensor is turned ON. Furthermore, sound effects and background music are not output.
This makes it possible to prevent meaningless notification such as notification that the limit function is installed even though the limit function is actually operating.

In (b2), no sound effect is output, but a sound effect (voice) such as "Play has been stopped" may be output. This makes it easier for the player to understand that play has been stopped audibly as well.

Figure 76 is a diagram illustrating a pre-notification mode that notifies the player of the remaining time before the limit function is activated. (a1) to (a3) show cases in which pre-notification is performed during a winning game, and (b1) to (b3) show cases in which pre-notification is performed during a time-saving game state (time-saving game state A).

(a1) shows the 10th round (final round) during a winning game, and displays a round image rg saying "Round 10," a right-hit image mg, an image 26e of the number of reserved balls in the first starting slot, and an image 26f of the number of reserved balls in the second starting slot. Also, corresponding background music is being output from the speaker 10 during the winning game.

(a2) shows the 10th round (final round) during a winning game, when a game ball enters the large prize slot 24, causing the difference in the number of balls to reach 90,000. At this time, a difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed, saying "5,000 balls left until the limit is activated," and the speaker 10 continues to output background music corresponding to the winning game, while also outputting an alarm sound to notify the player that the difference in the number of balls counter image rm has been displayed. For example, an alarm sound such as a "beep" is output, and the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed. In this way, a condition such as when the difference in the number of balls reaches 90,000 is set as a guideline for issuing an advance alarm.

Once this difference ball number counter image rm is displayed in (a2), it will continue to be displayed until the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. By "continuously displayed," we mean regardless of whether it is during a symbol change game, while waiting for customers, during a demo, or during a winning game. However, it may be hidden during a super reach even during a symbol change game.

(a3) shows the state of the special chance game after the end of a winning game, where the difference ball counter image rm continues to be displayed, and in this scene, it displays "4998 balls left until the limit is activated."

(b1) shows the time-saving game mode, with 50 spins remaining. In this scene, a symbol change game is being played, and other images displayed include the right-hit image mg, the first start slot reserved number image 26e, the second start slot reserved number image 26f, the change icon, and the reserved icon. Additionally, background music corresponding to the time-saving game mode is being output from the speaker 10.

(b2) indicates that the difference in the number of balls reaches "90,000" due to game balls entering the second start port 22 or the normal winning port 23 during the execution of the symbol change game shown in (b1). At this time, a difference in the number of balls counter image rm saying "5,000 balls left until the limit is activated" is displayed, and the speaker 10 continues to output background music corresponding to the time-saving game state, and outputs an alarm sound to notify that the difference in the number of balls counter image rm has been displayed. For example, an alarm sound such as a "beep" is output, and the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed.

(b3) shows a scene where there are 49 rounds remaining in the time-saving game state. In other words, the next symbol change game after (b1) and (b2) is currently being played. Let's assume that the number of out balls increases during the symbol change game, bringing the difference in the number of balls to 89,990. In this case, the difference in the number of balls falls below 90,000, but the difference in the number of balls counter image rm continues to be displayed, and a message such as "5,010 balls remaining until the limit is activated" is displayed. In other words, once the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed, it continues to be displayed thereafter, regardless of whether the difference in the number of balls exceeds or falls below 90,000. This prevents the image display device 26 from becoming difficult to see due to the difference in the number of balls counter image rm repeatedly being displayed and hidden when the difference in the number of balls repeatedly increases and decreases around 90,000.

Also, if the difference in ball count counter image rm is hidden when the difference in ball count falls below 90,000, and a new player starts playing at, say, 89,000 balls, the player will begin playing without realizing that the limit function is about to be activated. In such a case, even if the player wins a winning game and transitions to a special mode, the limit function will immediately be activated, forcing the player to stop playing. Therefore, by continuing to display the difference in ball count counter image rm rather than hiding it even when the difference in ball count falls below 90,000, it is possible to flexibly accommodate changes in players.

In addition, an alarm sound is output to notify the player that the difference ball number counter image rm has been displayed, making it easier for the player to notice that the difference ball number counter image rm has been displayed.

The update display of the difference ball number counter image rm (update display of XX balls remaining) may be set to update when there is a change of 100 balls, for example. This prevents the image display device 26 from becoming difficult to see due to frequent update display of the difference ball number counter image rm (update display of XX balls remaining).

Figure 77 is a diagram explaining various advance notification modes. Figure 76 explains the mode (Example 1) of Figure 77, but modes (Example 2) and (Example 3) described below may also be used.

(Example 1) is the state described in Figure 76. Timing T1 is the time when the game transitions from a high probability game state to a winning game, and since the limit management counter is less than "90,000", the difference ball number counter image rm is not displayed.

Timing T2 is the time when the difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter during a winning game becomes "90,000" or more, and the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed.
At timing T3, the time-saving game state after a winning game ends and the game transitions to the normal game state. In this way, even if the game state changes, the difference ball number counter image rm continues to be displayed.

Timing T4 indicates that the number of out balls has increased during normal gameplay, causing the limit management counter to fall below 90,000. In other words, even if the number of out balls falls below the difference in balls value of 90,000, which would cause the difference in balls counter image rm to be displayed, the difference in balls counter image rm will continue to be displayed.

(Example 2) differs from (Example 1) in that the difference ball number counter image rm is hidden when the limit management counter falls below 90,000 at timing T4, but is otherwise identical. In this way, there is no problem with hiding the difference ball number counter image rm that was displayed when the limit management counter fell below 90,000.

(Example 3) shows a mode in which the difference ball number counter image rm is displayed in a menu that is displayed when the effect button 14 is pressed while waiting for customers or during a demo. "Inside the menu" means within the menu screen, and when the menu is closed, the difference ball number counter image rm is also hidden.

Time T1 is when the menu is launched during the special mode. At this point, the limit management counter is less than 90,000, so the difference ball counter image rm will not be displayed on the menu screen even if the menu is launched.

Time T2 is the time when the game transitions from a probability variation state to a winning game, and time T3 is the time when the difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter reaches 90,000 or more during a winning game. Although the difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter reaches 90,000 or more at time T3, the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is not displayed because it is not possible to launch a menu during a winning game.

Time T4 is the time when the menu is launched during the time-saving game mode. In this case, the difference in ball count on the limit management counter is "90,000" or more, so the difference in ball count counter image rm is displayed on the menu screen.

Time T5 is when the menu is closed, and when the menu is closed, the difference ball number counter image rm is hidden. Time T6 is when the time-saving game mode ends and the game transitions to normal game mode. The menu is then launched in the normal game mode. At time T6, the difference ball number in the limit management counter is greater than or equal to 90,000, so the difference ball number counter image rm is displayed on the menu screen.

Time T7 is the time when the difference in balls on the limit management counter falls below 90,000. From then on, even if the menu is launched, the difference in balls counter image rm will not be displayed on the menu screen.

The above configuration can provide the following effects.
In (Example 1), if a player is replaced just before the limit function is activated, the new player who is about to start playing can be made aware of the current difference in the number of balls. Also, in (Example 2), unlike (Example 1), it is possible to prevent players who confirm that the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed from avoiding playing, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, in (Example 3), the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed on the menu screen, so it is possible to prevent the difference in the number of balls counter image rm from interfering with other displays during a symbol variation game, etc.

The difference ball counter image rm is not limited to the above and may be modified as appropriate. For example, when the difference ball count on the limit management counter reaches 90,000 or more, an abstract notification such as "The limit function is about to activate" may be displayed, but when the difference ball count on the limit management counter reaches 93,000 or more, a more specific notification such as "2,000 more balls until the limit activates" may be displayed. This allows for accurate notifications based on the likelihood of the limit function activating. For example, even if the difference ball count on the limit management counter reaches 90,000 or more and the message "5,000 more balls until the limit activates" is displayed, if the next win is a special F symbol that does not transition to a special game mode, there is a possibility that the remaining 5,000 balls will not be reached. Therefore, by gradually displaying abstract and specific notifications as described above, it is possible to prevent notifications from going to waste.

Also, when the difference in the number of balls on the limit management counter reaches "90,000" or more, it may display "5,000 balls left until limit activation," and hide this display after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. Furthermore, thereafter, as the difference in the number of balls on the limit management counter approaches "95,000," the frequency with which the difference in the number of balls counter image rm is displayed may be increased. For example, when the difference in the number of balls on the limit management counter reaches "94,000," it may be possible to display "XX balls left until limit activation" in increments of 100 balls for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). This allows the player to more effectively recognize that the limit function is approaching activation.

Figures 78 and 79 are figures explaining the aspects of the pre-reading presentation according to the current difference in the number of balls.
78 shows a pre-reading effect performed during a winning game, and FIG. 79 shows a pre-reading effect performed during a symbol-changing game. Note that the winning game is assumed to have been achieved with the special symbol E (corresponding to 10 rounds).

(a1) indicates that a winning game is in progress, and that the third round of play is currently underway. The second start port reserved number image 26f displays "4," indicating that four reserved memories are stored, and indicates that the first to fourth memory areas (see Figure 9) corresponding to the second start port 22 are all stored. It is also assumed that winning determination information (random number values) is stored in the first to fourth memory areas. The current difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter is "1000."

(a2) shows the third round of the winning game, with the meteor shower image hr1 displayed from the top right to the bottom left of the screen. This meteor shower image hr1 is displayed only when there is a winning game in the first to fourth memory areas (see Figure 9), and the display of this image suggests that a winning game will be played consecutively after the current winning game ends.

(a3) shows the display state after the meteor shower image hr1 has finished displaying. When the meteor shower image hr1 finishes displaying, a "V" icon image hr2 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area, indicating that a winning game will be played consecutively. This "V" icon image hr2 continues to be displayed from (a3) onwards until the final round. This allows the player to understand that a winning game will be played consecutively after the current winning game has finished.

(b1) to (b3), like (a1) to (a3), claim that winning determination information (random number value) is stored in the first to fourth memory areas (see Figure 9). However, unlike (a1) to (a3), the current difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter is "94,500." In other words, this is a situation in which the limit function may be activated during the winning game. In such a case, if the meteor shower image hr1 or the "V" icon image hr2 were displayed as in (a1) to (a3), suggesting that consecutive winning games will be played, the player's disappointment would increase. In other words, if the limit function were not activated, consecutive winning games would be possible, but the activation of the limit function prevents this. Therefore, as shown in (b1) to (b3), even if there is winning determination information (random number value) in the first to fourth memory areas (see Figure 9), by restricting the display of the meteor shower image hr1 and the "V" icon image hr2 (restricting the look-ahead effect), it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed.

The restrictions on the predictive effects described in Figure 78 may be applied to gaming machines equipped with the ST type probability variable game state described above, or gaming machines equipped with a falling lottery type probability variable game state. It may also be applied to the "V stock effect" that occurs during a winning game in so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machines. It may also be applied to the so-called "1G consecutive" that generates consecutive big bonuses in reel-type gaming machines (slot machines).

In addition, the effect that places restrictions during a winning game is not limited to a predictive effect, but can also be a probability variable promotion effect. A probability variable promotion effect is an effect in which, for example, a win game is triggered by a special symbol E, but a combination of decorative symbol images is displayed that suggests a transition to a time-limited play state (e.g., 444), giving the impression that the game has been promoted to a probability variable play state during the winning game. For example, if a probability variable promotion effect is executed when the current difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter is "94,500," even though another win game is actually possible, this will be prevented by the activation of the limit function, which could disappoint the player. Therefore, when the current difference in the number of balls in the limit management counter is "94,500," restricting the execution of the probability variable promotion effect can prevent the player from being disappointed, even if a win game is triggered by a special symbol E.

Furthermore, in the situations shown in Figures 78 (b1) to (b3), the pre-reading effect may be executed or its execution may be restricted. For example, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to execute the effect, and whether or not to execute the effect may be decided.

Figure 79 shows the relationship between the predictive effect during the symbol change game and the current difference in the number of balls.
(a1) shows the ending of a winning game, with the difference in the number of balls at this point being "94,950," meaning that there are "50" more balls left before the limit function is activated. Also, an image such as "One More Time" is displayed, suggesting that the game will transition to a probability variation state after the winning game ends.

(a2) shows the state of the symbol change game in the probability variation mode, with the RUSH image kg and right-hit image mg, which indicate the probability variation mode, being displayed. At this point, the difference in the number of balls is "94,940," with "60" more balls remaining before the limit function is activated.

(a3) shows that a game ball has entered the second start port 22 in the situation of (a2), the second start port reserved ball number image 26f changes from "2" to "3", and a new reserved ball icon is displayed in the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m. The reserved ball icon displayed in the second start port third reserved ball image display area 26m is, for example, a blue icon (filled in), and the winning sound "plonk♪" corresponding to the blue icon is output from the speaker 10. In other words, the reserved ball pre-reading effect described above is being executed. Note that even though the difference in the number of balls at the time of (a3) is "94,999", there are no restrictions on the execution of the reserved ball pre-reading effect, and it can be executed.

In this way, during a symbol-changing game, unlike during a winning game, there are no restrictions on the execution of the look-ahead effects, even if the limit function is about to be activated. The reason for this is that it is expected that the limit function will be activated more often during a winning game than during a symbol-changing game. In other words, since the possibility of the limit function being activated during a symbol-changing game is lower than during a winning game, restricting the execution of the look-ahead effects during a symbol-changing game would simply decrease the player's interest in the game, so the execution of the look-ahead effects is allowed without any restrictions. This prevents a decrease in player interest due to the look-ahead effects suddenly ceasing to be executed during a symbol-changing game, and makes it possible to execute look-ahead effects appropriately according to the situation in which the limit function is activated.

Note that in Figure 79, the hold pre-reading effect is used as an example of a pre-reading effect that is performed during a symbol change game, but this is not limiting and other pre-reading effects may also be allowed to be performed.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The pachinko gaming machine 1000 shown in the second embodiment is a sealed circulation type pachinko gaming machine.
Although the description will be given using a sealed circulation type pachinko gaming machine as an example, the same applies to medal-less gaming machines that do not use gaming medals.

The pachinko gaming machine 1000 contains gaming balls inside the gaming machine, making it impossible for players to come into contact with the gaming balls. The configuration for launching the gaming balls into the gaming area is the same as in the first embodiment.

When a game ball is fired into the game area, one is subtracted from the game ball information held by the player, and when the game ball enters a prize slot in the game area, the game ball information held by the player is incremented by the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize slot into which the ball entered. The configuration of the prize slots in the game area and the configuration of the image display device 26, etc. are the same as in the first embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine 1000 is provided with a game ball count display on a component equivalent to the tray component 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, which displays game ball information held by the player. A counting button is also provided near the game ball count display; when the counting button is pressed, game ball information is sent to a card unit provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1000, and the game ball information is recorded on a card inserted into the card unit. On the other hand, when the game start button on the card unit is pressed, the game ball information recorded on the card is subtracted (for example, "125" is subtracted with a single operation of the game start button), and "125" is displayed on the game ball count display. In other words, the card unit and pachinko gaming machine 1000 are connected so that they can communicate with each other.

The card unit is equipped with a control unit, which is equipped with an external output terminal for communicating with the hall computer 1001 and hall server 1002. The hall server 1002 then transfers information received from the pachinko gaming machine 1000 to the information management center 1003.

Like the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1000 is also equipped with a limit function, and the information sent to the information management center 1003 mentioned above includes the number of safe balls, the number of out balls, and the difference in the number of balls. This allows the information management center 1003 to also grasp information on the number of safe balls, the number of out balls, and the difference in the number of balls, and can also grasp information such as, for example, that the difference in the number of balls has reached "95,000" and the limit function has been activated.

In this way, not only is management done by the gaming parlor itself, but centralized management by the information management center 1003 can prevent actions such as clearing the RAM and enabling play during business hours on the same day after the limit function is activated.

As such, the second embodiment differs significantly from the first embodiment in that it uses an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine and that information from the pachinko gaming machine 1000 is transmitted to the hall control unit 1001 and information from outside the gaming parlor to the information management center 1003 via the control unit of the card unit. On the other hand, other configurations, such as performing a special symbol winning determination process and providing effects based on the results of that determination, and having multiple game states, may basically be applied mutatis mutandis to the contents of the first embodiment.

The details of the means and the like described in the gaming machine will be explained below.
This gaming machine is equipped with a main control means (main control board 100) that controls the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control unit 200a) that controls presentations in predetermined presentation means (image display device 26, speaker 10, light emitting device 9, board lighting device 29) based on control information (various commands) transmitted from the main control means, wherein the main control means measures a first value (number of safe balls) when a first measurement condition is met (a game ball entering the first start hole 21, a game ball entering the second start hole 22, a game ball entering the normal prize hole 23, a game ball entering the big prize hole 24), and measures a second value (number of safe balls) when a second measurement condition is met (a game ball entering the first start hole 21, a game ball entering the second start hole 22, a game ball entering the normal prize hole 23, a game ball entering the big prize hole 24). The game system is characterized in that it comprises a measuring means (main CPU 101, main RAM 103) that measures a second value (number of out balls) by detecting game balls, a calculating means (main CPU 101) that calculates specific information (difference in number of balls) based on the first value and the second value, and a regulating means (main CPU 101) that regulates the progress of the game (executes limit function activation processing) when the specific information meets a predetermined threshold (for example, 95,000), and when the specific information meets the predetermined threshold, the presentation control means is capable of using the predetermined presentation means to execute a warning notification regarding the forgetting of the prepaid card.

Note that while this embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, the content described in this embodiment can also be applied to slot machines, jan-ball gaming machines, and arrange-ball gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 26 Image display device 100 Main control board 200 Performance control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising: a main control means for executing predetermined control; a performance control means capable of controlling performances in a performance display means and a sound output means based on control information transmitted from the main control means; a winning hole provided in a gaming area into which a game ball can enter; an adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output from the sound output means; and a movable body capable of performing predetermined operations ,
The main control means
An acquisition means for acquiring determination information;
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information;
and a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined control when the value of specific information that can be calculated from the number of prize balls awarded by balls entering the winning slot and the number of game balls used in the game satisfies a predetermined value after the calculation condition is met;
When the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value during the execution of the special game, it is possible to restrict the execution of the predetermined control after the end of the special game,
When power is supplied with an initialization operation, the restriction on the execution of the predetermined control can be lifted,
The performance control means
When power is supplied, the initial operation of the movable body can be performed;
When the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value, a predetermined attention-calling image can be displayed on the effect display means,
When the power supply is cut off while the predetermined attention-calling image is being displayed and then the power supply is performed with the initialization operation, the initial operation of the movable body can be performed without displaying the predetermined attention-calling image,
When power supply is cut off while the predetermined attention-calling image is being displayed, and power supply is subsequently resumed without the initialization operation, the predetermined attention-calling image can be displayed,
An initial movement of the movable body can be performed while the predetermined attention-calling image is displayed,
After the value of the specific information satisfies a predetermined value during the execution of the special game and before the execution of the predetermined control is restricted after the special game ends, the volume value can be adjusted, but after the execution of the predetermined control is restricted after the special game ends, the adjustment of the volume value is restricted;
The effect display means can display a remaining number image until the value of the specific information reaches a predetermined value,
When the value of the specific information changes by a second number that is greater than the first number, the remaining number image can be updated and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by: